Garmin 2415 GPS Receiver User Manual

500W Series
Pilot’s Guide
& Reference
Foreword
Foreword
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Rd., S.E., Salem, Oregon 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/581.8101
Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southhampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
Tel. +44 (0) 870 850 1243
Fax +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
This manual reflects the operation of Main System Software versions 2.00, 3.00, or later. Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
© 2008 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this
manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium,
for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage
medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision
must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial
distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Garmin reserves the right to change or improve
their products and to make changes in the content of this material without obligation to notify any person or
organization of such changes or improvements.
March 2008
190-00357-00 Rev. C
INTRODUCTION
Cautions
Introduction
Cautions
CAUTION: The Global Positioning System is operated
by the United States government, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The system
is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Although the
Garmin 500W-series are precision electronic NAVigation AIDs (NAVAID), any NAVAID can be misused or
misinterpreted and therefore become unsafe.
CAUTION: Use the 500W-series at your own risk. To
reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review
and understand all aspects of this Owner’s Manual and
the Flight Manual Supplement, and thoroughly practice
basic operation prior to actual use. When in actual use,
carefully compare indications from the 500W-series to
all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDS, visual sightings, charts, etc. For
safety, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by the 500W-series
is geometric height above mean sea level and could
vary significantly from altitude displayed by pressure
altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: The Jeppesen database incorporated in
the 500W-series must be updated regularly in order
to ensure that its information is current. Updates are
released every 28 days. A database information packet
is included in your 500W-series package. Pilots using
an out-of-date database do so entirely at their own
risk!
CAUTION: GPS receivers operate by receiving and
decoding very low power radio signals broadcast by
satellites. It is possible that in some situations other
radio equipment or electronic equipment used in close
proximity to a GPS receiver may create electromagnetic
interference (EMI) which may affect the ability of the
GPS receiver to receive and decode the satellite signals.
In such event, the interference may be reduced or
eliminated by switching off the source of interference
or moving the GPS receiver away from it.
190-00357-00 Rev C
CAUTION: The electronic chart is an aid to navigation and is designed to facilitate the use of authorized
government charts, not replace them. Land and water
data is provided only as a general reference to your
surroundings. The positional accuracy of the land and
water data is not of a precision suitable for use in
navigation and it should not be used for navigation.
Only official government charts and notices contain
all information needed for safe navigation – and, as
always, the user is responsible for their prudent use.
CAUTION: The Terrain feature (in units not equipped
with TAWS) is for supplemental awareness only. The
pilot/crew is responsible for all terrain and obstacle
avoidance using information not provided by the
500W-series Terrain feature.
CAUTION: The Garmin 500W-series does not contain
any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only
be made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void your
warranty and authority to operate this device under
FCC Part 15 regulations.
NOTE: The GNS 500W-series units use a different
database than in the legacy units. The databases are incompatible between units. The GNS 500W-series units
must use a WAAS enabled database.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components
contain chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This
notice is being provided in accordance with California’s
Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like
additional information, please refer to our website at
www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: It is the pilot’s responsibility for initial missed
approach guidance in accordance with published procedure. The unit may not provide correct guidance until
established on a defined leg.
NOTE: GPS level of service annunciations (LPV, ENR,
etc. as shown on page 83) are not applicable to the
external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
i
INTRODUCTION
Cautions
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC limits for
Class B digital devices. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Furthermore, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by relocating the
equipment or connecting the equipment to a different circuit
than the affected equipment. Consult an authorized dealer or
other qualified avionics technician for additional help if these
remedies do not correct the problem.
To obtain accessories for your 500W-series, please contact
your Garmin dealer.
Help us better support you by completing our on-line registration form today! Registration ensures that you will be notified
of product updates and new products and provides lost or stolen unit tracking. Please, have the serial number of your unit
handy, connect to our web site (www.garmin.com) and look for
our Product Registration link on the home page.
The 500W-series display lenses are coated with a special antireflective coating which is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes
and abrasive cleaners. It is very important to clean the lens
using an eyeglass lens cleaner which is specified as safe for
anti-reflective coatings and a clean, lint-free cloth.
Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Garmin is fully committed to your
satisfaction as a customer. If you
have any questions regarding the
500W-series, please contact our
customer service department at:
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062-3426 U.S.A.
Phone: (913) 397-8200
Fax: (913) 397-8282
ii
190-00357-00 Rev C
INTRODUCTION
Accessories and Packing List
Accessories and Packing List
Congratulations on choosing the world’s finest
panel-mounted IFR navigation/communication system!
The 500W-series represents Garmin’s continued commitment to providing you with the most advanced
technology available today — in an accurate, easy-touse design suitable for all of your flying needs.
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified within this manual,
the term "500W-series" applies to the GPS 500W,
GNS 530W, and GNS 530AW models. Please, note
that the difference between the GNS 530W and GNS
530AW is indicated under "VHF COM Performance"
in the Specifications section of this manual (see
Appendix B).
Before installing and getting started with your new
system, please ensure that your package includes the
following items. If any parts are missing or are damaged, please contact your Garmin dealer.
Standard Package:
• Garmin 500W-series Unit
• NavData® Card
• Terrain Card
• GPS Antenna
• Installation Rack & Connectors
• Pilot’s Guide
• Quick Reference
• 400W/500W Series Display Interfaces
Addendum
• 400W/500W Series Garmin Optional Display
Interfaces Addendum
• GNS 400W/500W-series Simulator Training
CD-ROM
• Database Subscription Packet
• Warranty Registration Card
Upgrade Package:
• Garmin 500W-series Unit
• NavData® Card
• Terrain Card - Optional
• GPS Antenna
• Pilot’s Guide & Reference
• Quick Reference
• 400W/500W Series Display Interfaces
Addendum
• 400W/500W Series Garmin Optional Display
Interfaces Addendum
• GNS 400W/500W-series Simulator Training
CD-ROM
• Database Subscription Packet
• Warranty Registration Card
Your Garmin dealer will perform the installation
and configuration of your new 500W-series. After
installation, the NavData® card will already be installed
into the correct slot on the front of the unit (see
Appendix A). The 500W-series will be secured in the
installation rack with the proper wiring connections.
Have your dealer answer any questions you may have
about the installation — such as location of antennas
or any connections to other equipment in the panel.
190-00357-00 Rev C
iii
INTRODUCTION
Warranty
Limited Warranty
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the
date of purchase. Within this period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in
normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided
that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty does not cover failures due to
abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER
ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS
PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY
BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating
a Service Center near you, visit the Garmin Web site at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer
Service at 800-800-1020.
iv
190-00357-00 Rev C
INTRODUCTION
Table of Contents
Contents
Cautions...................................................................................i
Section 2 NAV Pages.......................................................... 29
Introduction.................................................................................i
Accessories and Packing List.............................................iii
Limited Warranty.................................................................iv
Model Descriptions............................................................. 1
GPS 500W...................................................................... 1
GNS 530W and GNS 530AW........................................... 1
Takeoff Tour............................................................................... 1
Key and Knob Functions.................................................. 2
Left-hand Keys and Knobs............................................... 2
Right-hand Keys and Knobs............................................. 3
Bottom Row Keys............................................................ 4
Power On............................................................................... 5
Powering up the 500W-series units................................. 5
Instrument Panel Self-Test................................................ 6
Fuel On Board and Checklists............................................ 7
Acquiring Satellites / Messages....................................... 8
Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies....................................... 9
Page Groups........................................................................ 10
NAV Pages............................................................................ 12
Default NAV Page.............................................................. 13
Map Page............................................................................. 14
NAVCOM Page.................................................................... 15
Direct-To Navigation......................................................... 16
IFR Procedures.................................................................... 17
Nearest Pages..................................................................... 18
Nearest Airport Page..................................................... 19
Nearest Airspace Page................................................... 20
Flight Plans.......................................................................... 21
Section 1 - COM - Communicating using the
GNS 530W. ................................................................................. 23
Volume................................................................................. 23
Squelch................................................................................. 23
COM Window and Tuning................................................. 24
Auto-Tuning........................................................................ 25
Emergency Channel........................................................... 28
Stuck Microphone.............................................................. 28
Remote Frequency Selection Control........................... 28
190-00357-00 Rev C
Main Page Groups.............................................................. 29
NAV Page Group................................................................. 29
Page Notation..................................................................... 29
Turn Advisory and Waypoint Alert................................. 29
Default NAV Page.............................................................. 30
Selecting Desired On-Screen Data.................................. 31
Restoring Factory Settings............................................. 32
Dual Unit Considerations............................................... 32
Default Nav Page Auto Zoom......................................... 33
Map Page............................................................................. 33
Map Symbols................................................................ 34
Map Range................................................................... 34
Map Page Auto Zoom.................................................... 34
Map Panning ............................................................... 35
Map Direct-To............................................................... 36
Airspace Information on the Map.................................. 36
Map Page Options........................................................ 38
Map Setup.................................................................... 39
Distance Measurements................................................ 40
Data Fields on the Map................................................. 41
Selecting Desired On-Screen Data.................................. 41
Restoring Factory Settings............................................. 42
Terrain Operation.............................................................. 43
Operating Criteria......................................................... 43
Terrain Limitations......................................................... 43
TERRAIN Alerting.......................................................... 43
Baro-Corrected Altitude................................................. 44
Terrain Page . ............................................................... 44
Inhibit Mode................................................................. 45
Terrain Symbols............................................................. 46
General Database Information....................................... 46
Database Updates......................................................... 47
Terrain/Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage................ 48
Navigation Database..................................................... 48
TERRAIN Alerts................................................................... 48
Pop-up Alerts................................................................ 48
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance................................ 49
Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)................................. 49
TERRAIN Failure Alert.................................................... 50
“TERRAIN Not Available” Alert...................................... 50
NAVCOM Page.................................................................... 53
Satellite Status Page......................................................... 55
v
INTRODUCTION
Dead Reckoning................................................................. 57
Section 3 Direct-To Navigation. .................................. 59
Section 5 - Procedures - Approaches, Departures,
& Arrivals................................................................................... 81
Approaches with Procedure Turns................................. 84
Flying the Procedure Turn................................................ 85
Flying the Missed Approach ........................................... 88
Flying an Approach with a Hold .................................... 90
Flying a DME Arc Approach............................................. 93
Vectors to Final.................................................................. 97
Flying the Vectors Approach........................................... 98
Course From Fix Flight Plan Legs................................. 100
ILS Approaches................................................................. 104
Selecting an ILS Approach........................................... 106
Flying the ILS Approach............................................... 107
Selecting an LPV Approach............................................ 110
Flying the LPV Approach.............................................. 111
RNAV Approach Procedures........................................... 112
Points to Remember for ALL Approaches.................. 113
Points to Remember for Localizer or VOR-based Approaches............................................................................. 113
Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King
KAP140/KFC225................................................................. 115
Selecting a Destination by Facility Name or City....... 60
Selecting a Destination from the Active Flight Plan. 61
Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct-To Destination . .................................................................................... 61
Shortcuts.............................................................................. 62
Cancelling Direct-To Navigation..................................... 63
Specifying a Course to a Waypoint................................ 63
Selecting Direct-To a Holding Pattern.......................... 64
Section 4 Flight Plans........................................................ 65
Flight Plan Catalog............................................................ 65
Flight Plan Editing............................................................. 65
Flight Plan Catalog Options............................................ 67
Activating Flight Plans................................................... 67
Inverting Flight Plans..................................................... 67
Create New Flight Plan.................................................. 67
Crossfill......................................................................... 68
Copying Flight Plans...................................................... 69
Deleting Flight Plans..................................................... 70
Delete All Flight Plans.................................................... 70
Sort List By Number/Comment....................................... 70
Active Flight Plan............................................................... 71
Active Flight Plan Options............................................... 71
Activate Leg.................................................................. 72
Crossfill......................................................................... 72
Copy Flight Plan............................................................ 72
Invert Flight Plan........................................................... 72
Delete Flight Plan.......................................................... 72
Select Approach............................................................ 73
Select Arrival................................................................. 73
Select Departure........................................................... 74
Remove Approach, Arrival, or Departure......................... 75
Closest Point of FPL....................................................... 75
Parallel Track................................................................. 76
Change Fields............................................................... 77
Restore Defaults............................................................ 78
Shortcuts.............................................................................. 78
vi
Section 6 WPT Pages......................................................... 117
190-00357-00 Rev C
WPT Page Group............................................................... 117
Finding the Desired Airport........................................... 118
Duplicate Waypoints....................................................... 119
Airport Location Page..................................................... 120
Airport Location Page Options..................................... 121
Airport Runway Page...................................................... 121
Airport Runway Page Options...................................... 122
Airport Frequency Page................................................. 123
Airport Frequency Page Options................................... 124
Airport Approach Page................................................... 125
Airport Approach Page Options................................... 126
Airport Arrival Page........................................................ 128
Airport Arrival Page Options........................................ 129
Airport Departure Page.................................................. 130
Airport Departure Page Options................................... 131
Intersection Page............................................................. 132
NDB Page........................................................................... 133
VOR Page........................................................................... 134
User Waypoint Page........................................................ 135
Creating User Waypoints............................................. 136
Creating User Waypoints from the Map Page............... 138
INTRODUCTION
Modifying User Waypoints........................................... 139
User Waypoint Page Options........................................ 140
User Waypoint List...................................................... 141
Section 7 NRST Pages....................................................... 145
NRST Page Group............................................................. 145
Navigating to a Nearby Waypoint............................... 147
Nearest Airport Page...................................................... 148
Nearest Intersection Page............................................. 149
Nearest NDB Page............................................................ 149
Nearest VOR Page............................................................ 150
Nearest User Waypoint Page......................................... 151
Nearest Center (ARTCC) Page....................................... 151
Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) Page................. 152
Nearest Airspace Page.................................................... 153
Section 8 VLOC (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope)
Receiver Operations.......................................................... 157
Ident Audio and Volume................................................. 157
VLOC Tuning Window...................................................... 157
VLOC Ident Window......................................................... 158
Auto-Tuning...................................................................... 158
CDI Key............................................................................... 160
Section 10 Vertical Navigation (VNAV). ................ 189
Section 11 Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE)
Interface................................................................................... 192
Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE)............................ 192
Pre-departure Verification of FDE................................ 192
Section 12 Messages, Abbreviations, & Nav
Terms.......................................................................................... 193
Messages........................................................................... 193
Turn Advisory and Arrival Annunciations................... 199
Abbreviations................................................................... 201
Navigation Terms............................................................. 205
Appendix A NavData Card Use.................................. 207
Appendix B Specifications. .......................................... 208
Appendix C Troubleshooting Q & A. ....................... 209
Index.......................................................................................... 215
Section 9 AUX Pages........................................................ 161
AUX Page Group............................................................... 161
Flight Planning Page....................................................... 162
Utility Page........................................................................ 170
Checklists................................................................... 172
Trip Statistics............................................................... 175
RAIM Prediction.......................................................... 175
Software Versions........................................................ 176
Database Versions....................................................... 176
Terrain Database Versions............................................ 176
Setup 1 Page..................................................................... 177
CDI / Alarms................................................................ 180
Units / Position............................................................ 182
Date / Time................................................................. 183
Display Backlight. . ..................................................... 184
Nearest Airport Criteria............................................... 184
Data Field Configuration............................................. 185
COM Configuration..................................................... 186
Restoring Factory Settings............................................ 187
Setup 2 Page..................................................................... 187
SBAS Selection............................................................ 187
190-00357-00 Rev C
vii
INTRODUCTION
Blank Page
viii
190-00357-00 Rev C
TAKEOFF TOUR
Model Descriptions
Model Descriptions
Service via the Garmin GDL 69/69A datalink receiver.
This guide covers the operation of the GNS 530W,
GNS 530AW, and the GPS 500W. In general, all
models will be referred to as the 500W-series, except
where there are physical or operational differences.
The 500W-series units are 6.25” wide and 4.60” high.
The display is a 320 by 234 pixel color LCD. The units
include two removable data cards, one with a Jeppesen
database (inserted in the left-most card slot) and the
second being a Terrain database (inserted in the rightmost card slot).
GNS 530W and GNS 530AW
The GNS 530W and GNS 530AW include all of the
features of the GPS 500W, and also includes a TSO’d
airborne VHF communications transceiver and a
TSO’d airborne VOR/Localizer and Glideslope receivers. This multipurpose unit is available with either a
10-watt (GNS 530W) or 16-watt (GNS 530AW) Com
transceiver. References to the GNS 530W also include
the GNS 530AW.
GPS 500W
The GPS 500W has a WAAS GPS engine and is
TSO C146a certified for primary domestic, oceanic,
and remote navigation including en route, terminal,
and non-precision approaches, and approaches with
vertical guidance, such as LPV and LNAV/VNAV. The
GPS 500W can simultaneously give aviators vital
approach information and weather and traffic data
in relation to their position on a large, color moving
map display. Thanks to a high-contrast color display,
the information can be easily read from wide viewing angles even in direct sunlight. Its color moving
map features a built-in database that shows cities,
highways, railroads, rivers, lakes, coastlines, and a
complete Jeppesen database. The Jeppesen database
(that can be updated with a front-loading data card)
contains all airports, VORs, NDBs, Intersections, FSSs,
Approaches, DPs/STARs, and SUA information.
Pilots will enjoy the GPS 500W as an MFD, especially when it is coupled with traffic, lightning detection, and weather interfaces. With the PC-based FDE
prediction program, the GPS 500W may be used for
oceanic or remote operations. For the latest in graphical and textual weather information, the GPS 500W
can connect to XM Satellite Radio’s XM WX Weather
Takeoff Tour
This Takeoff Tour is intended to provide a brief
introduction of the 500W-series major features. The
rest of this manual describes these features, and others,
in additional detail. Use this guide, as needed, to learn
or review the details regarding a particular feature. The
Index may be used to quickly locate the information
you want. Before flying with your 500W series unit,
take the time to review the information in the manuals
and practice with the trainer.
After you’re familiar with the basics, some suggested reading within the Reference section includes:
• Flight plan features - Section 4
• Waypoint information pages (database information)
- Section 6
• IFR procedures - Section 5
• Aux pages - Unit settings (configuring the unit to
your preferences) - Section 9
If you’re unable to locate the information you need,
we’re here to help! Garmin’s Customer Service staff is
available during normal business hours (U.S. Central
time zone) at the phone and fax numbers listed on
page ii. You can also reach us by mail (see page ii) or at
our web site address: www.garmin.com.
190-00357-00 Rev C
1
TAKEOFF TOUR
Key and Knob Functions
Key and Knob Functions
The 500W-series navigators are designed to make
operation as simple as possible. The descriptions on
the next three pages provide a general overview of the
primary function(s) for each key and knob. This Takeoff Tour section is intended to provide a brief overview
of the primary functions of your 500W-series unit.
Experiment with the unit and refer to the reference
sections for more information.
whichever is currently selected by
the tuning cursor. Press this knob
momentarily to toggle the tuning
cursor between the COM and VLOC
frequency fields.
W
The COM flip-flop key (GNS
530W) is used to swap the active and
standby COM frequencies. Press and
hold to select emergency channel
(121.500 MHz).
V
The VLOC flip-flop key (GNS
530W) is used to swap the active
and standby VLOC frequencies (i.e.,
make the selected standby frequency
active).
Left-hand Keys and Knobs
k
The VLOC volume knob (GNS
530W) controls audio volume for the
selected VOR/ Localizer frequency.
Press momentarily to enable/disable
the ident tone.
y
The large left knob (COM/VLOC)
(GNS 530W) is used to tune the
megahertz (MHz) value (to the left of
the decimal point) of the standby frequency for the communications transceiver or the VOR/Localizer receiver,
whichever is currently selected by the
tuning cursor.
v
The small left knob (PUSH C/V)
(GNS 530W) is used to tune the
kilohertz (kHz) value (to the right
of the decimal point) of the standby
frequency for the communications
transceiver or the VLOC receiver,
j
2
The COM power/volume knob
controls unit power and communications radio volume. Press momentarily
to disable automatic squelch control.
In the GPS 500W, this control is used
only for power.
190-00357-00 Rev C
GPS 500W
GNS 530W
On the GNS 530W, the
large and small left
knobs allow you to
tune the desired COM
or VLOC frequency.
TAKEOFF TOUR
Key and Knob Functions
Right-hand Keys and Knobs
The range key (RNG) allows you to
select the desired map scale. Use the
up arrow side of the key to zoom out
to a larger area, or the down arrow
side to zoom into a smaller area.
2.'
The direct-to key (direct-to) provides access to the direct-to function,
which allows you to enter a destination waypoint and establishes a direct
course to the selected destination.
See Section 3.
MENU
The menu key (MENU) displays
a context-sensitive list of options.
This options list allows you to access
additional features or make settings
changes which relate to the currently
displayed page.
CLR
The clear key (CLR) is used to erase
information or cancel an entry. Press
and hold this key to immediately
display the Default Navigation Page,
regardless of the page that is currently displayed.
ENT
The enter key (ENT) is used to
approve an operation or complete
data entry. It is also used to confirm
information, such as the Database
Page during power on.
D
t
The large right knob (GPS) is used
to select between the various page
groups: NAV, WPT, AUX or NRST.
190-00357-00 Rev C
With the on-screen cursor enabled,
the large right knob allows you to
move the cursor about the page.
r
The small right knob (PUSH CRSR)
is used to select between the various
pages within one of the groups listed
above. Press this knob momentarily
to display the on-screen cursor.
The cursor allows you to enter data
and/or make a selection from a list of
options.
Data is entered using the large and small
right knobs. Experiment with them to become efficient at entering data. This greatly
reduces the amount of time spent operating
the 500W-series unit in flight.
3
TAKEOFF TOUR
Key and Knob Functions
GPS 500W
GNS 530W
Bottom Row Keys
The nearest key (NRST) (GPS
500W) displays the Nearest Airports
page. Then, turning the small right
knob steps through the NRST pages.
CDI
The CDI key (GNS 530W) is used to
toggle the navigation source (GPS or
VLOC) which provides output to an
external HSI or CDI.
OBS
The OBS key is used to select
manual or automatic sequencing of
waypoints. Pressing this key selects
OBS mode, which retains the current
“active to” waypoint as your navigation reference even after passing the
waypoint (i.e., prevents sequencing
to the next waypoint). Pressing the
OBS key again returns to normal
operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints. Whenever OBS
mode is selected, you may set the
desired course to/from a waypoint
using the OBS Page, or an external
OBS selector on your HSI or CDI.
NRST
MSG
4
The message key (MSG) is used to
view system messages and to alert you
to important warnings and require190-00357-00 Rev C
ments when the MSG annunciator is
displayed. See Sections 12 and 9 for
more information on messages and
unit settings.
The flight plan key (FPL) allows
you to create, edit, activate and
invert flight plans, as well as access
approaches, departures and arrivals.
A closest point to flight plan feature
is also available from the flight plan
key. See Section 4 for more information on flight plans.
VNAV
The vertical navigation key
(VNAV) allows you to create a threedimensional profile which guides
you to a final (target) altitude at a
specified location. See Section 10.
PROC
The procedures key (PROC) allows
you to select approaches, departures
and arrivals from your flight plan.
When using a flight plan, available
procedures for your departure and/or
arrival airport are offered automatically. Otherwise, you may select the
desired airport, then the desired
procedure.
FPL
TAKEOFF TOUR
Power On
Power On
The Garmin 500W-series offers you accurate
navigational data and communication capability, along
with non-precision and precision approach certification in the IFR environment. The Takeoff Tour is
designed to familiarize you with the basic operation
of the 500W-series — including powering up the
unit, changing frequencies, entering data, performing a simple direct-to, selecting IFR procedures and
provides a limited introduction to using flight plans.
In addition, this section briefly covers the default
navigation, map and frequency pages available as part
of the NAV page group. These pages are used for most
of your in-flight navigation.
The Takeoff Tour assumes that the unit and antennas have been properly installed and you have not
changed any of the 500W-series default settings. If
you have changed any of the factory default settings
(position format, units of measure, selectable fields,
etc.), the pictures shown here may not exactly match
what you see on your 500W-series unit. Prior to using
your 500W-series unit for the first time, we recommend that you taxi to a location that is well away from
buildings and other aircraft so the unit can collect
satellite data without interruption.
Powering up the 500W-series units
The GNS 530W’s power and COM volume are
controlled using the COM power/volume knob at
the top left corner of the unit. In the GPS 500W, the
knob controls only power. Turning it clockwise turns
unit power on and increases the COM radio volume.
After turning the unit on, a Welcome Page is displayed
while the unit performs a self test, followed by a Land
Data Page.
The Database Confirmation Page appears next
and shows the current database information on the
NavData card (with the valid operating dates, cycle
number and database type indicated). The database
is updated every 28 days and must be current for
approved instrument approach operations. Information on database subscriptions is available inside your
500W-series package.
To acknowledge the database information, press
the ENT key .
Power-up Sequence
190-00357-00 Rev C
5
TAKEOFF TOUR
Instrument Panel Self-Test
Fuel Capacity is
entered manually
Check CDI/HSI,
RMI and other instruments to verify
these indications.
Fuel on board and fuel flow are
provided manually or by sensors, if installed
Select to Set Fuel Level
to Full Capacity
Should match
current OBS course
selection
Select to display
Checklists Page
Instrument Panel Self-Test
Once the database has been acknowledged, the
Instrument Panel Self-Test Page appears. To ensure
that your 500W-series unit and any connected instruments are working properly, check for the following
indications on your CDI/HSI, RMI, external annunciators and other connected instruments:
• Course deviation
• Glideslope
• TO/FROM flag
• Time to destination
• Bearing to destination
• Desired track
• Distance to dest.
• Ground speed
• All external annunciators (if installed)
The Instrument Panel Self-Test Page indicates the
currently selected OBS course, fuel capacity (CAP),
fuel on board (FOB) and fuel flow (FF). The fuel
capacity is entered manually. Fuel on board and fuel
flow may be manually entered if your installation does
not include connection to sensors which automatically
provide these figures.
6
To enter fuel capacity, fuel on board or fuel flow
figures (if not provided by sensors):
1.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the “CAP”,
“FOB” or “FF” field.
Turn the small and large right knobs to enter
the desired figure, then press ENT.
Enter the fuel capacity, fuel on board or fuel flow figures
directly onto the appropriate field of the Instrument Panel
Self-Test Page. Fuel on board and fuel flow are automatically
provided if your installation includes connection to external
sensors.
190-00357-00 Rev C
TAKEOFF TOUR
Fuel On Board and Checklists
Fuel On Board and Checklists
The Instrument Panel Self-Test Page includes selections to set fuel on board (FOB) to full capacity and
access the Checklists Page. This allows you to quickly
set fuel to full limits and display any checklists you’ve
entered, such as start up or takeoff checklists.
To set fuel on board to full (if not provided by
sensor):
1.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Set
Full Fuel?”.
Select “Go To Checklists?” to display the
Checklist Page and any available checklists. A
500W-series unit can hold up to nine checklists with up to 30 entries in each checklist.
3.
Once you’ve verified instrument operation with
the Instrument Panel Self-Test Page displayed, turn
the large right knob to highlight “OK?” and press
the ENT key.
Select “Set Full Fuel?” to set fuel on board
(FOB) to full capacity.
2.
Once you complete the desired checklist(s),
press the small right knob to return to the
Checklists Page. Press the small right knob
again to return to normal operation on the
Satellite Status or Map pages.
Press ENT and verify that fuel on board (FOB)
now matches the fuel capacity (CAP) figure.
Fuel on board is now reduced, over time, based
on the fuel flow (FF) figure.
To view the checklists page:
1.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Go To
Checklists?” and press ENT.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired
checklist, then follow the steps in Section 9 Aux
Pages - Utility Page (Checklists) to execute each
step in the selected checklist.
The Satellite Status Page appears as the 500Wseries unit begins to collect satellite information. An
“Acquiring” status is displayed on the Satellite Status
Page and the signal strength of any satellites received
appears as “bar graph” readings. This is a good indication that you are receiving signals and that a position
fix is determined. Following the first-time use of your
500W-series unit, the time required for a position fix
varies — usually within two minutes.
190-00357-00 Rev C
7
TAKEOFF TOUR
Acquiring Satellites / Messages
Acquiring Satellites / Messages
If the 500W-series unit has not been operated for a
period of six months or more, it may have to “Search
the Sky” to collect new data. This means the unit is
acquiring satellite data to establish almanac and satellite orbit information, which can take 5 to 10 minutes.
The Satellite Status Page displays a “Searching Sky”
status, and the message annunciator (MSG) above the
MSG key also flashes to alert you of a system message,
“Searching the Sky”.
The Satellite Status Page shows the ID numbers for the satellites and the relative signal
strength of each satellite received (as a “bar
graph” reading).
The Time and other data may not be displayed
until the unit has acquired enough satellites for a fix.
To view a system message, press MSG.
“Searching Sky” indicates that satellite almanac
data is not available. The data is recollected from the
first available satellite.
“Acquiring” indicates that satellites have been
located and information is being acquired, but the
receiver does not have enough satellites for a 3-dimensional position.
“3D NAV” indicates that a 3-dimensional position
is available.
MESSAGE PAGE
The Message Page appears and displays the status
or warning information applicable to the receiver’s current operating condition.
To return to the previous page after viewing a
message, press MSG again.
8
“3D DIFF NAV” indicates when a 3-dimensional
position is available and differential corrections are
being used.
The “INTEG” annunciator (bottom left corner of
the screen) indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient to pass built-in integrity monitoring tests.
190-00357-00 Rev C
TAKEOFF TOUR
GNS 530W only
Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies
While the GNS 530W is acquiring a position,
let’s take a minute to dial in the active and standby
frequencies you’ll be using for the first phase of your
flight. The GNS 530W display is divided into separate
‘windows’ (or screen areas), including a COM window,
VLOC window (by default with VOR ident/radial, but
selectable for other data — including a traffic display)
and a GPS window which occupies the right 3/4 of the
display.
COM Window:
Active Frequency
COM Window:
Standby Frequency
(with tuning cursor)
3.
Turn the small left knob to select the desired
kilohertz (kHz) value. For example, the “.70”
portion of the frequency “117.70”.
4.
To activate the selected frequency, press the
appropriate flip-flop key—COM for communication frequencies or VLOC for VOR/Localizer
frequencies.
Once you’ve entered the active frequency, simply
repeat steps 1 through 3, above, to enter the standby
frequency. After both communication frequencies have
been entered, you may elect to keep the COM window
‘hot’ by leaving the cursor on the standby frequency, or
move the cursor to the VLOC window by pressing the
small left knob.
VLOC Tuning Window and
VLOC Ident Window
(Ident Window is user-selectable)
Pushing the small left knob moves the tuning
cursor back-and-forth between the COM and VLOC
frequency windows. To select the active frequency, you
must first enter the frequency in the standby field, and
use the COM (or VLOC) flip-flop key to move it to
the active field.
To change the standby communication (COM) or
VLOC frequency:
1.
2.
Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies
If the tuning cursor is not currently in the
desired window (COM or VLOC), press the
small left knob momentarily to switch the
highlight between the COM and VLOC windows. Adjusting the frequencies with the large
and small left knobs will affect the standby
frequency.
Turn the large left knob to select the desired
megahertz (MHz) value. For example, the
“117” portion of the frequency “117.70”.
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: When selecting VLOC frequencies, the
tuning cursor automatically returns to the COM
window after 30 seconds of inactivity.
NOTE: GPS level of service annunciations (LPV, ENR,
etc. as shown on page 83) are not applicable to the
external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
Cursor highlights COM window.
To switch the active and standby frequencies, press the COM flip-flop key. Switching
the active and standby frequencies does not
remove the cursor from the COM window.
9
TAKEOFF TOUR
Page Groups
Page Groups
(Large right knob to change page groups)
(Small right knob to select pages within the group)
NAV Group
10
WPT Group
AUX Group
Default NAV
Airport Location
Airport Departure
Flight Planning
Map
Airport Runway
Intersection
Utility
Terrain
Airport Frequency
NDBs
Setup 1
NAVCOM
Airport Approach
VOR
Setup 2
Satellite Status
Airport Arrival
User Waypoint
190-00357-00 Rev C
TAKEOFF TOUR
Page Groups
(Large right knob to change page groups)
(Small right knob to select pages within the group)
NRST Group
FPL Group
VNAV
(Press FLP)
(Press VNAV)
Vertical Navigation
Nearest Airport
Nearest Center
Active Flight Plan
Nearest Intersection
Nearest FSS
Flight Plan Catalog
PROC
(Press PROC)
Nearest NDB
Nearest Airspace
Procedures
NOTE: The number of NAV pages available vary depending on the installation
of options. See 400W/500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot's Guide Addendums.
Nearest VOR
Selection of any main page is performed using the
large and small right knobs. The large right knob
selects the page group: NAV, WPT, AUX or NRST. The
small right knob selects the desired page within a
group. To quickly select the Default NAV page, Press
and hold CLR.
Nearest User Wpt
190-00357-00 Rev C
11
TAKEOFF TOUR
NAV Pages
NAV Pages
The map page is one of five or more pages available under the NAV group. The previous page shows
the organization of the main page groups. Additionally, page groups for flight plans, procedures and
vertical navigation are available by pressing the key
corresponding to the desired function (FPL, PROC
or VNAV). Selecting one of these stand-alone page
groups, in effect, exits the main page groups and
displays a page for the desired function. When pressing
the same function key a second time, the 500W-series
unit returns to the main page group and the previously
displayed page.
To select the desired NAV page, turn the small right
knob until the desired page is displayed.
If you are currently viewing a page that is not part
of the NAV group, you can quickly return to the NAV
group using the CLR key. The number of Nav group
pages available varies with installed equipment.
To select the NAV group and display the Default
NAV Page, press and hold CLR.
In addition to the group of NAV pages, additional
groups of pages are available for waypoint information
(WPT), auxiliary (AUX) functions such as flight planning or unit settings, and listings for nearest (NRST)
airports or other facilities.
1. To select the desired page group, turn the
large right knob until a page from the desired
group is displayed.
2. To select the desired page within the group,
turn the small right knob until the desired
page is displayed.
12
190-00357-00 Rev C
The bottom right corner of the screen indicates
the page group currently being displayed (e.g.,
NAV or NRST), the number of screens available
within that group (indicated by rectangular
icons) and the placement of the current screen
within that group (indicated by a highlighted
square icon). To select a different page within
the group, turn the small right knob.
See the 400W/500W Series Display Interfaces
Pilot’s Guide Addendum, part number 19000356-31 and the 400W/500W Series Garmin
Optional Displays Pilot’s Guide Addendum, part
number 190-00356-30.
TAKEOFF TOUR
Default NAV Page
Default NAV Page
During most flights, the Default NAV, Map and
NAVCOM pages are the primary pages used for navigation. The Default NAV Page displays a “look ahead”
map, graphic course deviation indicator (CDI), the
active leg of your flight plan (as defined by the current
“from” and “to” waypoints), and four user-selectable
data fields. The default settings for these fields are distance to waypoint (DIS), desired track (DTK), ground
speed (GS) and estimated time en route (ETE). See
Section 12 for definitions of these navigation terms.
The default NAV page is selected by pressing and holding the CLR key or turning the small right knob.
From the Default NAV Page, simply turn the
small right knob to display the available pages. The
NAVCOM Page displays the available frequencies
(communication and navigation) for the departure
airport, any en route airports that are included in your
flight plan, and the final destination airport. When
using the direct-to function, frequencies are listed for
the airport nearest to your starting position and the
destination airport.
To change the data fields in the corners of the
Default NAV Page:
1.
Press MENU (with the Map Page displayed).
The data fields on the Default NAV Page
may be custom-tailored to your preferences. A menu selection is provided to
“Change Fields?”.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Change Fields?” and press ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
data field you wish to change.
4.
Turn the small right knob to select the type
of data you want to appear on this field and
press ENT.
User-selectable Data Fields
(all four corners)
Bearing indicator to
the current active
TO waypoint
Active Leg of Flight Plan,
or Direct-to Destination
Course Deviation
Indicator (CDI)
The large right knob is used to select the
data field you wish to change. Then use
the small right knob to display a list of
data options and select the desired data
item.
5.
DEFAULT NAV page
190-00357-00 Rev C
Press the small right knob to remove the
cursor.
13
TAKEOFF TOUR
Map Page
Map Page
The Map Page displays your present position
(using an airplane symbol) relative to nearby airports,
VORs, NDBs, intersections, user waypoints and
airspace boundaries — and your route displayed as a
solid line. The current Map Scale is indicated in the
lower left corner and adjustable using the RNG key.
The Map Scale refers to the distance from the
bottom to the top of the viewable display.
After the GNS 530W acquires satellites and computes a position, the Map Page appears automatically.
Map Display
Present Position
Desired
Track
Map
Scale
While viewing the map page, you
can quickly declutter and remove
many of the background map details
by pressing the CLR key (repeatedly)
until the desired detail is depicted.
MAP PAGE
To adjust the map scale:
1.
Press the up arrow on the RNG key to zoom
out to a larger area.
OR,
2.
14
By adding data fields along the
right-hand side, the Map Page can
combine a moving map display
and navigation data for complete
situational awareness. Map setup
pages are provided to add these
data fields and to designate the
maximum scale at which each map
feature appears. These settings
provide an automatic decluttering
of the map (based upon your preferences) as you adjust the scale.
Press the down arrow on the RNG key to zoom
in to a smaller area.
190-00357-00 Rev C
To change the map scale, use the
RNG key.
TAKEOFF TOUR
NAVCOM Page
NAVCOM Page
Frequency Type
Frequency List
The Navigation/Communications (NAVCOM) Page
provides a complete list of airport frequencies at your
departure, en route and arrival airports.
A frequency listed on the NAVCOM Page can be
quickly transferred to the standby field of the COM
or VLOC windows. This time saving process prevents
having to “re-key” a frequency already displayed elsewhere on the screen.
To display the frequency list for the desired flight
plan or direct-to airport:
1.
Push the small right knob to activate the
cursor on the airport identifier field (in the GPS
window).
2.
Turn the small right knob to display the list
of airports (departure, arrival and en route) for
your flight plan or direct-to. Continue to turn
the small right knob until the desired airport
is selected.
3.
NAVCOM PAGE
To select a communication or navigation frequency:
1.
Push the small right knob to activate the
cursor in the GPS window.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired
frequency from the list.
3.
Press ENT to transfer the selected frequency
to the standby field in the COM or VLOC
window. COM frequencies automatically go
to the standby field of the COM window and
navigation frequencies automatically go to the
standby field of the VLOC window, regardless
of the window currently highlighted by the
cursor.
4.
To activate the selected frequency, press the
COM or VLOC flip-flop key.
Press ENT to display the frequency list for the
selected airport.
190-00357-00 Rev C
15
TAKEOFF TOUR
Direct-To Navigation
Direct-To Navigation
5.
The 500W-series unit can use direct point-to-point
navigation to guide you from takeoff to touchdown,
even in the IFR environment. Once a destination is
selected, the unit provides course and distance data
based upon a direct course from your present position
to your destination. A destination can be selected from
any page with the direct-to key.
Press ENT to confirm the identifier. The “Activate?” function field is highlighted.
Destination Waypoint
Identifier Field
Confirm the selected direct-to destination by
highlighting “Activate?” and pressing ENT.
6.
“Activate?”
Function Field
Select Direct-To Waypoint Page
To select a direct-to destination:
16
1.
Press the direct-to key. The Select Direct-to
Waypoint Page appears with the destination
field highlighted. The direct-to waypoint may
also be selected by facility or city name. See
Section 3 for more information.
2.
Turn the small right knob to enter the first
letter of the destination waypoint identifier. The
destination waypoint may be an airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or user waypoint, as long as
it is in the database or stored in memory as a
user waypoint.
3.
Turn the large right knob to the right to move
the cursor to the next character position.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to spell out the rest of
the waypoint identifier.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Press ENT to activate a direct-to course to the
selected destination. Press and hold CLR to
return to the default NAV page.
TAKEOFF TOUR
IFR Procedures
IFR Procedures
3.
Once the direct-to or flight plan is confirmed, the
whole range of instrument procedures is available to
you. Departures (SIDs), arrivals (STARs), non-precision and precision approaches are stored within the
NavData card and available using the PROC key.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
procedure and press ENT.
A window appears to select the desired
procedure. Use the small right knob to make
your selection.
4.
For approaches, a window appears to select
the desired initial approach fix (IAF) or a
“vectors” option to select just the final course
segment of the approach. Turn the small right
knob to select the desired option and press
ENT. (Vectors guidance is relative to the final
inbound course. A line is drawn beyond the
final approach fix, allowing you to intercept
the final course segment beyond its normal
limits.)
5.
For departures and arrivals, pop-up windows
appear to select the desired transition and
runway(s). Turn the small right knob to select
the desired option and press ENT.
6.
With “Load?” highlighted, press ENT to add
the procedure to the flight plan or direct-to.
Press the PROC key to display the procedures
page. Turn the large right knob to select the
desired option.
To display the Procedures Page, press PROC.
The steps required to select and activate an
approach, departure or arrival are very similar. In this
introductory section, we’ll show examples of the steps
required to select an approach, but keep in mind the
same process also applies to departures and arrivals.
To select an approach, departure, or arrival:
1.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
the “Select Approach?” option (or “Select
Arrival?”/“Select Departure?”) from the Procedures Page.
Press ENT to display a list of available procedures for the arrival (when using approaches
or STARs) or departure (when using SIDs)
airport.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival
airport is added to the sequence of waypoints in the
flight plan or direct-to (as shown on the Active Route
Page). You can later “activate” the selected procedure
from the Procedures Page or the Active Flight Plan
Page.
190-00357-00 Rev C
17
TAKEOFF TOUR
Nearest Airports
Nearest Pages
To display the NRST pages:
The NRST page group provides listings for nearest
airports or other facilities. The NRST group includes
detailed information on the 25 nearest airports, VORs,
NDBs, intersections and user-created waypoints within
200 nautical miles of your current position. In addition,
pages are also provided to display the five nearest center
(ARTCC/FIR) and Flight Service Station (FSS) points
of communication, plus alert you to any special-use or
controlled airspace you may be in or near.
1.
If necessary, press the small right knob to
remove the cursor from the page.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the NRST
page group, as indicated by “NRST” appearing
in the lower right corner of the screen.
The Nearest Airport Page (shown at left) is one of
eight pages available under the NRST group:
• Nearest Airport Page
• Nearest Intersection Page
• Nearest NDB Page
To display a list of nearby airports, turn the
large right knob to select the NRST page
group and (if needed) the small right knob to
select the Nearest Airport Page.
• Nearest VOR Page
• Nearest User Waypoints Page
• Nearest ARTCC Page
To scroll through the list, press the small
right knob, then turn the large right knob.
• Nearest FSS Page
• Nearest Airspace Page
18
3.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
NRST page.
TAKEOFF TOUR
Nearest Airports
Nearest Airport Page
You may examine both the communication
frequencies and runway information directly from
the Nearest Airport Page. As discussed earlier for the
NAVCOM Page, you may also place any displayed
frequency into the standby COM or VLOC field by
highlighting the frequency with the cursor and pressing ENT.
To view additional information for a nearby
airport:
The Nearest Airport Page may be used in conjunction with the direct-to key to quickly set a course to
a nearby facility in an in-flight emergency. Selecting a
nearby airport as a direct-to destination overrides your
flight plan or cancels a previously selected direct-to
destination (you still have the option of returning to
your flight plan by cancelling the direct-to.)
To select a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
From the Nearest Airport Page...
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired
airport from the list.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired
airport from the list.
3.
Press ENT to display waypoint (WPT) information pages for the selected airport.
3.
Press the direct-to key, ENT and ENT (again)
to navigate to the nearby airport.
To select a nearby airport as a new destination, highlight its identifier, press the directto key, ENT and ENT (again).
Additional information for a nearby airport is
available by highlighting an identifier on the
list and pressing ENT.
4.
To display runway and frequency information, press the small right knob to remove
the cursor and turn the small right knob to
display the desired information page.
From an Airport Information Page...
1.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Press the direct-to key, ENT and ENT (again)
to navigate to the nearby airport.
19
TAKEOFF TOUR
Nearest Airspace
Nearest Airspace Page
The last page in the NRST group, the Nearest
Airspace Page, provides information for up to nine
controlled or special-use airspaces near or in your
flight path. Airspace information appears on this page
based upon the same criteria used for airspace alert
messages. Nearby airspace information and airspace
alert messages are provided according to the following
conditions:
• If your projected course takes you inside
an airspace within the next ten minutes,
the message “Airspace ahead -- less than 10
minutes” appears.
• If you are within two nautical miles of an
airspace and your current course is such
that it will take you inside that airspace, the
message “Airspace near and ahead” appears.
To view additional information about the
airspace, select the nearest airspace page.
Detailed information is available by highlighting the airspace name and pressing ENT.
To view an airspace alert message:
1.
Press the MSG key. The message page appears
with the alert message.
• If you are within two nautical miles of an
airspace and your current course is such
that it will not take you inside that airspace,
the message “Near airspace less than 2nm”
appears.
• If you have entered an airspace, the message
“Inside Airspace” appears.
By default, airspace alert messages are turned off.
When turned on, the message (MSG) annunciator
located directly above the MSG key flashes to alert
you to the airspace message.
20
When an airspace alert occurs, the message
(MSG) annunciator flashes at the bottom of the
screen. Press MSG to view the alert message.
Press MSG again to return to the previous
display.
Note that the airspace alerts are based upon threedimensional data (latitude, longitude and altitude)
to avoid nuisance alerts. The alert boundaries for
controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide
complete information on any nearby airspace. Additional information about a nearby airspace — such as
controlling agency, frequency and floor/ceiling limits
— is available from the nearest airspace page.
2.
190-00357-00 Rev C
TAKEOFF TOUR
Flight Plans
Flight Plans
The 500W-series unit lets you create up to 20 flight
plans, with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan.
Flight plans are created, edited and activated using the
FPL key. The FPL page group includes two pages: the
Active Flight Plan Page and the Flight Plan Catalog.
The Active Flight Plan Page provides information
and editing features for the flight plan currently in
use (referred to as “flight plan 00”). The Flight Plan
Catalog serves as the main page for creating new flight
plans, as well as editing or activating previously created flight plans.
To create a new flight plan, select “Create New Flight Plan?” from the Flight Plan
Catalog Options.
4.
The cursor appears on the first waypoint identifier field (located directly below “WAYPOINT”).
Use the large and small right knobs to enter
the identifier of the first waypoint in the flight
plan (the small knob is used to select the
desired letter or number and the large knob is
used to move to the next character space.).
Active Flight Plan Page with flight plan currently in use.
Since using flight plans is arguably one of the more
complex features of the 500W-series unit, we’ll only discuss it briefly here — focusing on creating a new flight
plan and activating it to use for navigation. Additional
information about flight plans can be found in the
Flight Plan section (Section 4).
Enter the identifier for each airport and/or
navaid into the flight plan in the same
sequence you wish to fly.
To create a new flight plan:
1.
2.
3.
Press the FPL key and turn the small right
knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog Options.
Turn the large right knob to select “Create
New Flight Plan?” and press ENT.
5.
Press ENT once the identifier has been selected.
The cursor moves to the next blank waypoint
identifier field.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5, above, until all waypoints
for the flight plan have been entered.
190-00357-00 Rev C
21
TAKEOFF TOUR
Flight Plans
7.
Press the small right knob to remove the
highlighting. Once the flight plan is created,
it may be activated from an options window.
Activating the flight plan copies it into “flight
plan 00” (the original flight plan still resides in
the Flight Catalog) and replaces any flight plan
which currently exists in “flight plan 00.”
To activate the new flight plan:
1.
On the Flight Plan Catalog page, press the
small right knob to activate the cursor. Rotate
the large right knob to highlight the desired
flight plan.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog Options.
3.
Turn the small right knob to select “Activate
Flight Plan?” and press ENT.
Select “Activate Flight Plan?” from the page
menu to begin using the new flight plan.
22
190-00357-00 Rev C
GNS 530W only
Section 1 - COM Communicating using the
GNS 530W
1 - COM
Radio Volume / Auto Squelch
Squelch
The GNS 530W features a digitally-tuned VHF
COM radio that provides a seamless transition from
communication to navigation. The GNS 530W’s
COM radio operates in the aviation voice band, from
118.000 to 136.975 MHz, in 25 kHz steps (default).
For European operations, a COM radio configuration
of 8.33 kHz steps is also provided.
The COM radio features an automatic squelch to
reject many localized noise sources. You may override
the squelch function by pressing the COM power/
volume knob. This facilitates listening to a distant station or setting the desired volume level.
While receiving a station, an “RX” indication
appears in the upper right corner of the COM
window — to the immediate right of “COM”. A “TX”
indication appears at this location while you are transmitting.
“TX” appears at the upper right corner of the
COM window while transmitting.
Press the COM power/volume knob momentarily to override the automatic squelch.
Note the “RX” receive indication when
receiving a station.
Volume
COM radio volume is adjusted using the COM
power/volume knob. Turn the COM power/volume
knob clockwise to increase volume, or counterclockwise to decrease volume.
To override the automatic squelch, press the
COM power/volume knob momentarily. Press COM
power/volume knob again to return to automatic
squelch operation. 190-00357-00 Rev C
23
1 - COM
Com Window and Tuning
GNS 530W only
COM Window and Tuning
Communication frequencies are selected with the
tuning cursor in the standby COM frequency field,
and using the large and small left knobs to dial in
the desired frequency. The standby frequency always
appears below the active frequency. The active frequency is the frequency currently in use for transmit
and receive operations.
Once the standby frequency is selected, use
the COM flip-flop key to make the frequency
active for transmit and receive operations.
Tuning cursor in the COM window. Use the
small and large left knobs to dial in the
desired standby frequency.
A frequency may also be quickly selected from the
database by simply highlighting the desired frequency
on any of the main pages and pressing ENT. This process is referred to as “auto-tuning”. Once a frequency
is selected in the standby field, it may be transferred
to the active frequency by pressing the COM flip-flop
key.
24
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: The tuning cursor normally appears in the
COM window, unless placed in the VLOC window
by pressing the small left knob. When the tuning
cursor is in the VLOC window, it automatically
returns to the COM window after 30 seconds of
inactivity. The active frequency in either window
cannot be accessed directly — only the standby
frequency is highlighted by the tuning cursor.
GNS 530W only
To select a COM frequency:
1.
If the tuning cursor is not currently in the COM
window, press the small left knob momentarily.
2.
Turn the large left knob to select the desired
megahertz (MHz) value. For example, the
“118” portion of the frequency “118.300”.
3.
Turn the small left knob to select the desired
kilohertz (kHz) value. For example, the “.300”
portion of the frequency “118.300”.
1 - COM
Auto-Tuning / Nearest Apt Page
frequencies from some of the main GPS pages.
To select a COM frequency for a nearby airport:
1.
Select the Nearest Airport Page from the NRST
page group. (See Section 7, or press and hold
CLR, then turn the large right knob until the
nearest pages appear. Finally, if necessary, turn
the small right knob to display the Nearest
Airport Page.)
To make the standby frequency the active frequency, press the COM flip-flop key.
The tuning cursor remains in the COM window. If
you wish to select a VOR/localizer/ILS frequency, press
the small left knob momentarily to place the cursor in
the VLOC window. Additional instructions for VOR/
localizer/ILS operations are available in Sections 5 and 8.
Cursor in VLOC window allows for VOR and
ILS operations.
Nearest Airport Page with common traffic
advisory frequency (CTAF) for the closest
airport highlighted.
2.
Press the small right knob momentarily to
place the cursor on the airport identifier field of
the first airport in the list. If you wish to select
another airport, turn the large right knob to
highlight the desired airport.
3.
The Nearest Airport Page displays the common
traffic advisory frequency (CTAF) for each listed
airport. To select this frequency, turn the large
right knob to highlight the desired airport’s
CTAF frequency and press ENT to place the
frequency in the standby field of the COM
window.
Auto-Tuning
The GNS 530W’s auto-tune feature allows
you to quickly select any database frequency in
the GPS window as your standby frequency. Any
COM frequency displayed in the GPS window
can be transferred to the standby COM frequency
field, with a minimum of keystrokes required. The
following are some examples of selecting COM
190-00357-00 Rev C
25
1 - COM
Auto-Tuning FSS & Center Freqs
GNS 530W only
To display the entire list of frequencies for a
nearby airport and select from that list:
To select a COM frequency for a nearby flight
service station (FSS) or center (ARTCC):
1.
Start with the desired airport highlighted on
the Nearest Airport Page (as described on the
previous page), then press ENT.
1.
2.
Press the small right knob to remove the
cursor and turn the small right knob to display the frequency list.
Use the nearest ARTCC Page to quickly retrieve the frequency(s) for the nearest center
(ARTCC) facility.
From the Nearest Airport Page, select the
desired airport to show a more detailed listing of frequencies for that airport.
26
Select the Nearest Center or Flight Service
Page from the NRST page group. (Turn the
large right knob until the NRST pages appear.
Then, if necessary, turn the small right knob
to display the desired NRST page.)
3.
Press the small right knob momentarily to
reactivate the cursor and turn the large right
knob to highlight the desired frequency.
4.
Press ENT to place the highlighted frequency
in the standby COM window field.
5.
Before leaving the frequency page, use the
large right knob to highlight “Done?” and
press ENT. “Done?” always needs to be
acknowledged before leaving a page group.
2.
Press the small right knob momentarily to
place the cursor on the page.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
FSS/ARTCC frequency and press ENT to place
the frequency in the standby field of the COM
window.
190-00357-00 Rev C
GNS 530W only
1 - COM
Auto-Tuning from Flight Plan
To select a COM frequency for any airport in your
flight plan:
To select a COM frequency for any airport in the
database:
1.
1.
Select the NAVCOM Page from the NAV page
group. (See Section 2, or press and hold CLR,
then turn the small right knob until the
NAVCOM Page appears.)
The NAVCOM Page provides a frequency list
for all the airports (departure, en route and
arrival) along your active flight plan.
2.
3.
Press the small right knob to place the cursor
on the airport identifier field. To the left of this
field appears Departure, En Route or Arrival
— depending on the placement of the displayed airport within your flight plan.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
listing the airports in your flight plan. Continue
turning the small right knob to select the
desired airport.
4.
Press ENT to return to the NAVCOM Page with
the frequencies for the selected airport.
5.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired frequency.
6.
Press ENT to place the highlighted frequency
in the standby COM window field.
Select the Airport Frequencies Page from the
WPT page group. (See Section 6, or turn the
large right knob to select the WPT page
group. Then turn the small right knob until
the Airport Frequencies Page appears.)
Use the Airport Frequencies Page to retrieve
a frequency list for ANY airport in the
Jeppesen NavData database.
2.
Press the small right knob to place the cursor
on the airport identifier field.
3.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the identifier of the desired airport. Press ENT
when finished.
4.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired frequency.
5.
Press ENT to place the highlighted frequency
in the standby COM window field.
190-00357-00 Rev C
27
1 - COM
Emergency Channel / Stuck Mic
GNS 530W only
Emergency Channel
The GNS 530W’s emergency channel select provides a quick method of selecting 121.500 MHz as the
active frequency in the event of an in-flight emergency.
The emergency channel select is available whenever
the unit is on, regardless of GPS or cursor status, or
loss of the display.
A “COM push-to-talk key stuck” message appears to warn
you of a stuck microphone. Transmitting is disabled after 35
seconds of continuous broadcasting.
Remote Frequency Selection Control
Press and hold the COM flip-flop key for
two seconds to activate the 121.500 MHz
emergency frequency.
To quickly tune and activate 121.500, press
and hold the COM (or remote) flip-flop key for
approximately two seconds. If the remote key is
used, further changes in COM frequency will not
be possible without recycling power.
NOTE: Under some circumstances if the com system
loses communication with the main system, the radio
will automatically tune to 121.500 MHz for transmit
and receive regardless of the displayed frequency.
Stuck Microphone
Whenever the GNS 530W is transmitting, a
“TX” indication appears in the COM window. If the
microphone is stuck or accidentally left in the keyed
position, or continues to transmit after the key is
released, the COM transmitter automatically times out
(or ceases to transmit) after 35 seconds of continuous
broadcasting. You will also receive a “COM push-totalk key stuck” message as long as the stuck condition
exists.
28
On units configured for remote Com frequency
recall*, pressing the remote recall switch will load the
next preset Com frequency into the unit’s Standby frequency box and display a temporary pop-up window
with the current Preset ID number—e.g., Preset 1 or
Preset 12. The remote recall switch can be pressed
multiple times to scroll the entire preset frequency
list through the Standby frequency box (the list will
“wrap” from the bottom of the list back up to the top,
skipping any empty preset positions).
The standby frequency isn’t activated until a Com
flip flop switch (either remote- or bezel-mounted) is
pressed. Remote Frequency Selection only functions
on units configured for a remote Com Frequency recall
switch. See Aux Pages - Setup 1 Page Preset Com Frequencies for instructions on storing preset Com frequencies.
190-00357-00 Rev C
* Preset Com
Frequencies are
only available
with Main
System Software
Version 3.00, or
later.
2 - NAV PAGES
Page Groups / NAV Page Group
Section 2
NAV Pages
Main Page Groups
The 500W-series main pages are divided into groups:
NAV, WPT, AUX and NRST. While viewing any of these
pages, selection of another page is a simple selection
process using the small and large right knobs.
NAV
WPT
5-7 available pages
(see list below)
10 available pages
(see Section 6)
AUX
NRST
4 available pages
(see Section 9)
8 available pages
(see Section 7)
The NAV page group includes five, or more, pages.
While viewing any NAV page, turn the small right
knob to select a different NAV page. You may find
this selection process convenient to cycle between
the Default NAV and Map Pages — two of the most
frequently used pages. Other pages are provided to
list frequencies for your flight plan, show your current
position and display current satellite reception.
NOTE: Five or more NAV pages are available
depending on installation of optional information sources. See the 400W/500W Series Display
Interfaces Pilot's Guide Addendum.
Page Notation
To select the desired page group, turn the large
right knob until a page from the desired group is
displayed.
To select the desired page within the group, turn
the small right knob until the desired page is
displayed.
The bottom right corner of the screen indicates
the page group that is currently being displayed (e.g.
NAV or NRST), the number of screens available within
that group (indicated by rectangular icons) and the
placement of the current screen within that group
(indicated by a highlighted rectangular icon). To select
a different page within the group, turn the small right
knob.
NAV Page Group
Turn Advisory and Waypoint Alert
Default NAV
Map
NAVCOM
Satellite Status
Terrain
This part of the screen is also used to display the
500W-series turn advisories (e.g., “Left to 209° in 9
sec”) and waypoint alerts (e.g., “Arriving at waypoint”)
during flight plan and approach operations. See Section 5 for more information.
190-00357-00 Rev C
29
2 - NAV PAGES
Default NAV Page
Default NAV Page
The first NAV page is the Default NAV Page. This
page may be quickly selected from ANY page by using
the CLR key.
Bearing pointer to the
current TO waypoint
User-selectable Data
Fields
(all four corners)
Course Deviation
Indicator (CDI)
Active Leg of Flight Plan,
or Direct-to Destination
First Page in NAV Group
To select the NAV group and display the Default
NAV Page, press and hold CLR.
You may also manually select the desired scale setting as outlined in Section 9.
The graphic CDI shows your position at the center
of the indicator, relative to the desired course (the
moving course deviation needle). As with a traditional
mechanical CDI, when you’re off course simply steer
toward the needle. The TO/FROM arrow in the center
of the scale indicates whether you are heading to the
waypoint (an up arrow) or if you have passed the
waypoint (a down arrow).
The default NAV Page provides a “look ahead”
map display with your present position at the bottom
center of the page. The top of the page displays
desired track (DTK), ground track (TRK) and distance
to destination waypoint (DIS). The bottom of the page
indicates ground speed (GS), active to/from waypoints
(only active to, for a direct-to destination) and estimated time en route. A graphic course deviation
indicator (CDI) also appears at the bottom of the page.
Unlike the angular limits on a CDI coupled to a VOR
or ILS receiver, full scale limits for this CDI are defined
by a GPS-derived distance (2.0, 1.0 or 0.3 NM). By
default, the CDI scale automatically adjusts to the
desired limits based upon the current phase of flight:
en route, terminal area or approach.
30
NOTE: Approaching the FAF, the GNS 500W-series
unit automatically rescales in an angular fashion. This
allows the LPV approach to be flown identically to a
standard ILS. At 2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is
tightened from 1.0 to the angular full scale deflection
defined for the approach.
190-00357-00 Rev C
The following symbols are used — on the
Default NAV Page directly above the graphic
CDI — to depict the “active leg” of a flight
plan or direct-to.
Direct-To a Waypoint
Course to a Waypoint, or Desired
Course between Two Waypoints
Right Procedure Turn
Left Procedure Turn
Vectors-To-Final
DME Arc to the left
DME Arc to the right
Left-Hand Holding Pattern
Right-Hand Holding Pattern
2 - NAV PAGES
Default NAV Page
NOTE: The 500W-series unit always navigates TO a
waypoint unless the OBS switch is set (preventing
automatic waypoint sequencing), or you have passed
the last waypoint in your flight plan.
Selecting Desired On-Screen Data
At the corners of the Default NAV Page are four
user-definable fields which display the data you need
as your flight progresses.
Directly above the CDI the active leg of your flight
plan is shown, or the direct-to destination when using
the direct-to key. This automatically sequences to the
next leg of your flight plan as you reach each interim
waypoint. If no flight plan or direct-to destination has
been selected, this line remains blank.
The scale of the “look ahead” map display appears
in the bottom left corner. The displayed scale is the
distance from the bottom to the top of the viewable
area on the screen. Nine scale settings, ranging from
5.0 NM to 200 NM are available. Use the RNG key to
select the desired range.
To change the data type displayed at any of
the four corners on the page, press MENU
and select the “Change Fields?” option.
By default, these fields display desired track (DTK),
distance to destination (DIS), ground speed (GS) and
estimated time en route (ETE). However, each of these
fields can be custom-tailored to your preferences by
selecting a different data item. Available data items
include:
Nine map scale settings are available on the
Default NAV Page — from 5.0 to 200 nautical
miles. To adjust the map range, use the RNG
key.
To adjust the map range:
1.
Press the up arrow on the RNG key to zoom
out to a larger area.
OR,
2.
Press the down arrow on the RNG key to zoom
in to a smaller area.
190-00357-00 Rev C
• Bearing to destination (BRG)
• Distance to destination (DIS)
• Desired track (DTK)
• En Route safe altitude (ESA)
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA)
• Estimated time en route (ETE)
• Total Fuel Flow (FLOW)
• Ground speed (GS)
• Minimum safe altitude (MSA)
• Track angle error (TKE)
• Ground track (TRK)
• Vertical speed required (VSR)
• Cross track error (XTK)
31
2 - NAV PAGES
Default NAV Page
If no flight plan or direct-to destination has been
selected only speed, track, altitude, fuel flow and minimum safe altitude data may be displayed. All other
data types appear as blank lines — on the Default NAV
Page — until a destination is selected.
Restoring Factory Settings
You can also quickly return all data field settings to
their original factory settings.
To select a different data item for any data field:
1.
Starting with the Default NAV Page, press the
MENU key to display an options menu.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Change Fields?” and press ENT to select this
option.
3.
Use the large right knob to highlight the data
field you wish to change.
The “Restore Defaults?” option returns all
data fields to their original factory settings.
4.
Turn the small right knob to display the list
of available data items. Continue turning the
small right knob to select the desired data
item from the list.
To restore all four selectable data fields to factory
default settings:
1.
Starting with the Default NAV Page, press the
MENU key to display an options menu.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“Restore Defaults?” option and press ENT.
Dual Unit Considerations
Once “Change Fields?” is selected, use the
large right knob to select the field you wish
to change and the small right knob to select
the new data type.
32
5.
Press ENT to select the desired data item and
return to the Default NAV Page.
6.
Press the small right knob to remove the
cursor from the page.
A “Crossfill?” option is provided from the Default
NAV Page. This option allows you to transfer a directto destination, the active flight plan, any stored flight
plan or user waypoints to a second 400W or 500Wseries Garmin unit.
Some crossfill operations can be done automatically. If the crossfill method in both 500W (or 400W)series units is set to “auto”, a change in the direct-to
destination or active flight plan on one unit can also be
seen on the other. See Section 4 - Flight Plans - Flight
Plan Catalog Options for additional details on using
the “Crossfill?” option.
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: The databases of the 400/500 series and the
400W/500W are incompatible, so you may not mix
systems.
2 - NAV PAGES
Map Page
Default Nav Page Auto Zoom
Map Page
An autozoom feature is available for the Default
NAV Page, which automatically adjusts from an en
route range of 200 nautical miles through each lower
range, stopping at 5.0 nautical miles as you approach
your destination waypoint. By default, the autozoom
feature is disabled.
The second NAV page is the map page, which displays your present position using an airplane symbol,
along with nearby airports, navaids, user-defined
waypoints, airspace boundaries, lakes, rivers, highways and cities.
To enable (disable) the autozoom feature:
1.
Starting with the Default NAV Page, press the
MENU key to display an options menu.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Enable
Auto Zoom?” (or “Disable Auto Zoom?”) and
press ENT to select this option.
NOTE: The electronic chart is an aid to navigation and
is designed to facilitate the use of authorized government charts, not replace them. Land and water data is
provided only as a general reference to your surroundings. The positional accuracy of the land and water
data is not of a precision suitable for use in navigation
and it should not be used for navigation. Only official
government charts and notices contain all information
needed for safe navigation – and, as always, the user is
responsible for their prudent use.
Map Display
Autozoom automatically adjusts the map
range as you approach your destination
waypoint.
Desired
Track
Present
Position
Map Range
Second Page in Data Fields
NAV Group
The Map Page is the second of the Nav pages
(six, or more, if equipped with weather,
traffic, radar, or other systems). The map
range is depicted in the lower left corner and
adjusted with the RNG key.
Five user-selectable data fields can be added to
the right-hand side of the Map Page. By default, the
displayed data is destination waypoint name (WPT),
desired track (DTK), ground track (TRK), distance to
destination waypoint (DIS) and ground speed (GS).
Adding these data fields or changing the data types is
outlined later in this section.
190-00357-00 Rev C
33
2 - NAV PAGES
Map Page
NOTE: If the 500W-series unit is unable to determine
a GPS position, the present position (airplane) symbol
will appear on the Map Page in yellow. No symbol will
be present when there is no active flight plan.
Map Symbols
Various symbols are used to distinguish between
waypoint types. The identifiers for any on-screen
waypoints can also be displayed. (By default the identifiers are enabled.) Special-use and controlled airspace
boundaries appear on the map, showing the individual
sectors in the case of Class B, Class C, or Class D
airspace. The following symbols are used to depict the
various airports and navaids on the Map Page:
Airport with hard surface runway(s); Primary runway shown
Airport with soft surface runway(s) only
Private Airfield
Intersection
VOR
VORTAC
VOR/DME
TACAN
DME
NDB
Localizer
Locator Outer Marker
Heliport
Map Range
The map display can be set to 23 different range
settings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles (statute
and metric units are also available). The range is indicated in the lower left-hand corner of the map display,
and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by
the map display.
34
The map range appears in the lower left corner.
Use the RNG key to select the desired map range.
To select a map range:
Press the up arrow side of the RNG key to
zoom out to a larger map area.
2. Press the down arrow side of the RNG key
to zoom in to a smaller map area and more
detail.
Map Page Auto Zoom
An autozoom feature is available which automatically adjusts from an en route range of 200 NM
through each lower range, stopping at a range of
1.0 NM as you approach your destination waypoint.
The autozoom feature is turned on/off from the map
setup page described later in this section.
1.
The Map Page also displays a background map
showing lakes, rivers, coastlines, highways, railways
and towns. When a map scale is selected below the
lower limit at which the map detail was originally
created, an “overzoom” indication appears on the map
display, below the scale reading. “Overzoom” indicates
that the detail at this scale may not accurately represent actual conditions (and extra caution should be
observed when these scales are used for navigation).
The “Setup Map?” option allows you to define the
maximum scale at which each map feature appears.
This provides you with complete control to minimize
screen clutter. You can also quickly remove items from
the map using the CLR key.
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Map Panning
To quickly declutter the map display, press the
CLR key momentarily (as often as needed) to
select the desired amount of map detail.
Panning the map lets you look beyond the
boundaries of the current map area without
changing the scale. Start by pressing the
small right knob.
To quickly declutter the map, press CLR.
Continue pressing CLR to select the desired
declutter level. Note the scale is followed
“-1”, “-2” or “-3”.
To select the panning function and pan the map
display:
Map Panning
Another Map Page function is panning, which
allows you to move the map beyond its current limits
without adjusting the map scale. When you select
the panning function — by pressing the small right
knob — a target pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display
showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
plus the bearing and distance to the pointer from your
present position.
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
panning target pointer.
2.
Turn the small right knob to move up (turn
clockwise) or down (turn counterclockwise).
3.
Turn the large right knob to move right (turn
clockwise) or left (counterclockwise).
4.
To cancel the panning function and return to
your present position, press the small right
knob.
When the target pointer is placed on an object, the
name of that object is highlighted (even if the name
wasn’t originally displayed on the map). This feature
applies to airports, navaids, user-created waypoints,
roads, lakes, rivers — just about everything displayed
on the map except route lines.
When an airport, navaid, or user waypoint is
selected on the map display, you can review information about the waypoint or designate the waypoint
as your direct-to destination.
190-00357-00 Rev C
35
2 - NAV PAGES
Map Direct-To
To review information for an on-screen airport,
navaid or user waypoint:
1.
Use the panning function (as described on the
previous page) to place the target pointer on
a waypoint.
2.
Press ENT to display the waypoint information
page(s) for the selected waypoint.
3.
Press CLR to exit the information page(s).
Airspace Information on the Map
When a special-use or controlled airspace boundary appears on the map display, you can quickly
retrieve information — such as floor/ceiling limits and
controlling agency — directly from the map.
Map Direct-To
To designate an on-screen airport, navaid or user
waypoint as your direct-to destination:
1.
Use the panning function (see previous page)
to place the target pointer on a waypoint.
2.
Press the direct-to key. The Select Direct-to
Waypoint Page appears, with the selected
waypoint already listed.
3.
Press ENT twice to confirm the selection and
begin navigating to the waypoint.
The direct-to function can be used anywhere on
the map. If nothing currently exists at the crosshair
position, a new waypoint (called “+MAP”) is created
at the target pointer location before the direct-to is
initiated.
Use the panning function and ENT key to
retrieve airspace information from the map.
To view airspace information for an on-screen
special-use or controlled airspace:
1.
Use the panning function and direct-to key to
select a destination waypoint directly from
the map. “+MAP” is created as a waypoint if
nothing exists at the pointer’s location.
36
190-00357-00 Rev C
Use the panning function (see previous page)
to place the target pointer on an open area
within the boundaries of an airspace. If the
area is congested and it is difficult to select an
open area, you may need to zoom in or press
CLR to make the selection easier.
2 - NAV PAGES
Airspace Information
2.
Press the ENT key to display the Page Menu.
Highlight “Review Airspace?”.
3.
Press ENT to display the airspace information.
Press ENT again to return to the Nav page.
5.
Press ENT to view the frequencies. Turn the
large right knob to scroll through the available frequencies.
6.
To automatically load a frequency into the Com
standby position, turn the large right knob
to highlight a frequency and then press ENT.
7.
For frequency information, turn the large right
knob to highlight an “Info?” selection.
To display airspace frequencies:
1.
While viewing the Nav map page, press the
small right (CRSR) knob. Turn the large and
small right knobs to highlight an airspace
arc.
2.
Press the ENT key to display the Page Menu.
Highlight “Review Airspace?”.
3.
Press ENT to display the airspace information.
4.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “View
Frequencies?”.
190-00357-00 Rev C
37
2 - NAV PAGES
Map Page Options
8.
Press ENT to view the frequency information.
Press ENT with “Done?” highlighted to return
to the airspace frequency display.
8.
Turn the large knob to highlight “Done?” and
press ENT to return to the Nav page. Press the
small right (CRSR) knob to remove the map
pointer.
Map Page Options
Many of the 500W-series functions are menu
driven. Each of the main pages has an options menu,
allowing you to custom tailor the corresponding page
to your preferences and/or select special features
which specifically relate to that page. A Map Page
Options menu provides additional settings to customize the Map Page and additional features related
specifically to the Map Page.
With the Map Page displayed, press MENU to
display the Map Page Options menu. Use the
large right knob to select the desired option.
The following options are available: “Setup Map?”,
“Measure Dist?”, “Data Fields Off?”, “Clear Storm
Data?”*, “Change Fields?” and “Restore Defaults?”.
38
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Map Setup
Map Setup
To change a map setup feature:
“Setup Map?” allows you to configure the map
display to your preferences, including map orientation,
land data enable/disable, Jeppesen data enable/disable,
automatic zoom, airspace boundaries, and text size.
The following table lists the group names and available
settings:
1.
Press MENU (with the Map Page displayed).
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Setup
Map?” and press ENT.
3.
To change map orientation: Turn the small
right knob to select “Map” and press ENT.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“Orientation” field, then turn the small right
knob to select the desired option . Select
“North up” to fix the top of the map display to
a north heading. Select “Track up” to adjust the
top of the map display to your current ground
track. Select “DTK up” to fix the top of the map
display to your desired course. Press ENT to
accept the selected option.
4.
To enable/disable automatic zoom: Turn the
small right knob to select “Map” and press
ENT. Turn the large right knob to highlight
the “Auto Zoom” field and turn the small
right knob to select “On” or “Off”. Press ENT
to accept the selected option. The automatic
zoom feature automatically adjusts the map
scale from 2000 NM through each lower scale,
stopping at 1.0 NM as you approach your
destination waypoint.
5.
To enable/disable all background land data or
Jeppesen aviation data: Turn the small right
knob to select “Map” and press ENT. Use the
large right knob to highlight the appropriate field and turn the small right knob to
select “On” or “Off”. Press ENT to accept the
selected option.
Feature
Map
Weather*
Traffic*
Line/Road
Waypoint
Airspace
City/Other
Description
Orientation, AutoZoom, Land Data,
Aviation Data, Wind Vector
Lightning Mode, Lightning Symbol
Traffic Mode, Traffic Symbol, Traffic Label
Active Flight Plan/Direct-To, Lat/Lon
Grid, Freeways, National Highways,
Local Highways, Local Roads, Railroads
Active Flight Plan Waypoints, Large/
Medium/Small Airports, Intersections,
NDBs, VORs, User Waypoints,
Waypoint Text
Class B, Class C, Class D, Restricted,
MOA, Other, (TFR if GDL 69 equipped)
Large/Medium/Small Cities and Text,
State/Province Boundaries, Rivers/Lakes
* Weather and Traffic settings are only available when the
500W-series unit installation includes connection to traffic
and/or weather information sources. See 400W/500W Series
Display Interfaces Pilot's Guide Addendum.
190-00357-00 Rev C
39
2 - NAV PAGES
Distance Measurements
6.
7.
8.
40
To enable/disable the on-screen wind vector*:
Turn the small right knob to select “Map”
and press ENT. Use the large right knob to
highlight the “Wind Vector” field and turn the
small right knob to select “On” or “Off”.
Press ENT to accept the selected option.
For airports, NAVAIDs, active flight plan
waypoints, user-created waypoints, state/provincial boundaries, rivers/lakes and cities: Turn
the small right knob to select the appropriate
“Group” name (per the chart on the previous
page) and press ENT. Use the large right
knob to highlight the “RNG” field for the
desired feature and turn the small right knob
to select the maximum scale at which the feature should appear on screen. Or select “Off”
to never display the selected feature. Press
ENT to accept the selected option. Next, turn
the large right knob to highlight the “TEXT”
field for the desired feature and turn the small
right knob to select the desired text size, or
select “Off” to disable text descriptions. Press
ENT to accept the selected option.
For airspace boundaries, highways, roads,
railroad lines, active flight plan course lines,
and lat/long grid lines: Turn the small right
knob to select the appropriate “Group” name
(per the chart on the previous page) and press
ENT. Use the large right knob to highlight the
“RNG” field for the desired feature and turn
the small right knob to select the maximum
scale at which the feature should appear on
screen. Or select “Off” to never display the
selected feature. Press ENT to accept the
selected option.
Distance Measurements
The “Measure Dist?” option provides a quick, easy
method for determining the bearing and distance
between any two points on the map display.
To measure bearing and distance between two
points:
1.
Press MENU (with the Map Page displayed).
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Measure Dist?” and press ENT. An on-screen
reference pointer appears on the map display
at your present position.
Once “Measure Dist?” is selected, place the
on-screen pointer on the point you wish to
measure FROM and press ENT.
3.
Use the small and large right knobs to place
the reference pointer at the location you wish
to measure FROM and press ENT.
4.
Again, use the small and large right knobs to
place the reference pointer at the location you
wish to measure TO. The bearing and distance
from the first reference location appear at the
top of the map display.
5.
To exit the “Measure Dist?” option, press the
small right knob.
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Data Fields on the Map
Data Fields on the Map
Selecting Desired On-Screen Data
The “Data Fields On?” option provides a map
display (shown at right) with five user-selectable data
fields along the right-hand side of the screen. Select
this option when you wish to display additional onscreen data — such as destination waypoint name
(WPT), desired track (DTK), ground track (TRK),
distance to destination (DIS) and ground speed (GS).
If this option has been selected and the data fields
are being displayed, “Data Fields Off?” appears as an
option instead.
“Change Fields?” allows you to choose the data displayed on the five user-selectable data fields along the
right-hand side of the map page (see previous page).
There are a number of available data types, including
bearing to destination, distance to destination, estimated time of arrival, ground speed, minimum safe
altitude and track. See Section 12 for descriptions of
these (and other) navigation terms.
To change a data field:
1.
Press MENU (with the Map Page displayed).
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Change Fields?” and press ENT.
“Data Fields On?” adds five user-selectable
data fields to the right-hand side of the page.
Select “Change Fields?” to change any of
these fields to a different data type.
Once “Change Fields?” is selected, turn the
large right knob to highlight the data field
you wish to change, then turn the small right
knob to select the type of data to display in
that field.
To turn the data fields on (or off), turn the large
right knob to highlight “Data Fields On?” (or
“Data Fields Off?”) and press ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
data field you wish to change.
4.
Turn the small right knob to select the type
of data you want to appear on this field and
press ENT.
5.
Press the small right knob to remove the
cursor.
190-00357-00 Rev C
41
2 - NAV PAGES
Restoring Factory Settings
NOTE: The on-screen traffic information (TRFC) occupies two data fields, leaving room to display only
three additional data types. Traffic information is
only available when the 500W-series unit installation
includes connection to traffic information sources. See
the 400W/500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot's Guide
Addendum.
Restoring Factory Settings
“Restore Defaults?” resets all five user-selectable
data fields to their original factory default settings.
“Restore Defaults?” resets all five user-selectable data fields to their original factory
settings.
To restore the factory default settings, turn the
large right knob to highlight “Restore Defaults?”
and press ENT.
42
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Operation
Terrain Operation
During power-up of the 500W Series unit, the
terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed along
with a disclaimer. At the same time, the Terrain system
self-test begins. A failure message is issued if the test fails.
Garmin TERRAIN is a non-TSO-C151b-certified
terrain awareness system provided as a standard feature
of 500W-Series units to increase situational awareness
and help reduce controlled flight into terrain (CFIT).
TAWS is an optional feature on 500W-Series units.
Information on TAWS is provided in the 400W/500W
Series Optional Displays Addendum, p/n 190-00356-30.
Operating Criteria
TERRAIN requires the following to operate properly:
• The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position
solution.
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database.
Terrain Limitations
NOTE: 500W-Series units may display either a TERRAIN
Page or a TAWS Page, (or neither, but not both) depending
upon the installed hardware and configuration.
TERRAIN displays terrain and obstructions relative to
the altitude of the aircraft. The displayed alerts are advisory
in nature only. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. However, all obstructions
may not be available in the database and data may be
inaccurate. Never use this information for navigation or to
maneuver to avoid obstacles.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation
information in a database that may contain inaccuracies.
Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational
awareness. Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to
avoid terrain.
TERRAIN uses terrain and obstacle information
supplied by government sources. The data undergoes
verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information
should never be understood as being all-inclusive.
NOTE: The data contained in the TERRAIN databases
comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot
guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
TERRAIN Alerting
TERRAIN uses information provided from the GPS
receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude.
GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS
altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based
altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine
TERRAIN alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected
by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject
to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not
require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and
reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and
obstacle alerts.
TERRAIN utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that
are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TERRAIN displays a 2-D
picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore,
the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation
to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner,
TERRAIN can provide advanced alerts of predicted
dangerous terrain conditions. Detailed alert modes are
described later in this section.
190-00357-00 Rev C
43
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Operation
Baro-Corrected Altitude
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived
by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude
can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight
path. However, because actual atmosphere conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the
International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values),
it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from
the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This
variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from
the baro-corrected altitude.
TERRAIN Page with 360° View
NOTE: The Terrain Page gives a “Track Up” display
orientation, as indicated by the “TRK” label shown on
the display. This is the only orientation available on this
page.
To display a 120˚ view:
Terrain Page
To display the Terrain Page, select the NAV
group and turn the small right knob until the
Terrain Page is displayed. The page displays terrain
information, aircraft ground track, and GPS-derived
MSL altitude. Altitude is shown in increments of 20
feet or in increments of 10 meters, depending on unit
configuration. The “G” to the right of the MSL altitude
display reminds the pilot that altitude is GPS-derived.
The Terrain Page has two selectable view settings:
• 360˚ View—View from above aircraft depicting
surrounding terrain on all sides
• 120˚ View—View of terrain ahead of and 60˚ to
either side of the aircraft flight path
1.
Select the Terrain Page and press MENU.
2.
Select “View 120˚?”.
Press ENT. To switch back to a 360˚ view,
repeat step 1, select “View 360˚?”, and press
ENT.
Seven display ranges are available, allowing for a
more complete view of the surrounding area.
3.
To change the display range:
1.
Select the Terrain Page and press up or down
on the RNG key to select the desired range:
1 NM, 2 NM, 5 NM, 10 NM, 25 NM, 50 NM,
100 NM.
Aviation information such as airports, VORs, and
other navaids can be turned on or off from the Terrain
Page.
“Show Aviation Data?” Menu
Selection
44
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Operation
To show or hide aviation data:
To inhibit Terrain:
1.
2.
1.
Select the Terrain Page and press MENU.
“Inhibit Terrain?” is selected by default.
2.
Press ENT. The Terrain system is inhibited. The
annunciation is displayed in the
terrain annunciator field whenever terrain is
inhibited.
Select the Terrain Page and press MENU.
Select “Show (or Hide) Aviation Data” and
press ENT. Pressing the CLR key when the
TERRAIN Page is displayed will also toggle
aviation information on or off.
Inhibit Mode
The Garmin Terrain system provides an “inhibit
mode”. This mode is designed to deactivate Premature
Descent Alert/Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
(PDA/FLTA) visual alerts when they are deemed
unnecessary by the pilot. Flying VFR into an area
where unique terrain exists could cause the system
to annunciate a nuisance alert. Pilots should use
discretion when inhibiting the TERRAIN system
and always remember to enable the system when
appropriate. When Terrain is inhibited, the terrain
page will still be active, but alerts and messages will
not be generated. See the Terrain Alerts section for
more information on terrain alerts.
TERRAIN configured units will restore the “inhibit
state” at startup to the last pilot-selected setting. TAWS
configured units will always start up with TAWS alerts
uninhibited.
To enable TERRAIN:
Enabling Terrain
1.
Select the Terrain Page and press MENU.
“Enable Terrain?” is selected by default.
2.
Press ENT. The Terrain system is functional
again.
Inhibiting Terrain
190-00357-00 Rev C
45
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Operation
Terrain Symbols
General Database Information
The following symbols are used to represent
obstacles and potential impact points on the Terrain
Page. Note that obstacle symbols are shown on display
zoom ranges up to 10 NM:
The Garmin TERRAIN system uses terrain and
obstacle information supplied by government sources.
The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm
accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151b. However, the
information displayed should never be understood to
be all-inclusive. Pilots must familiarize themselves
with the appropriate charts for safe flight.
The Garmin TERRAIN system uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain information
relative to aircraft altitude. Each color is associated
with an alert severity level. Terrain graphics and visual
annunciations also use these color assignments.
NOTE: If an obstacle and the projected flight path of
the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in
to the closest potential point of impact on the TERRAIN
Obstacle Symbol
Page.
Unlighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle
databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but
cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The terrain/obstacle databases are contained on a
datacard which is inserted in the right-most slot of the
500W Series units.
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Color
(Alert Level)
Red
(Warning)
Yellow
(Caution)
TERRAIN/Obstacle
Location
Terrain/Obstacle above or
within 100 ft below current
aircraft altitude
Terrain/Obstacle between
100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Terrain Color Symbology
Potential Impact Point
Projected Flight Path
£ääÊvÌÊ/…ÀiŜ`Ê
Unlighted Obstacle
4ERRAINABOVEOR
WITHINFT
BELOWTHEAIRCRAFT
ALTITUDE2ED
£äääÊvÌÊ
4ERRAINBETWEENFTANDFTBELOWTHE
AIRCRAFTALTITUDE9ELLOW
4ERRAINMORETHANFTBELOWTHEAIRCRAFTALTITUDE"LACK
TERRAIN Altitude/Color Correlation
46
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Operation
Database Versions
The version and area of coverage of each terrain/obstacle database is shown on the Terrain Database Versions Page, located in the AUX Page Group.
Databases are checked for integrity at power-up. If a
database is found to be missing and/or deficient, the
Terrain system fails the self-test and issues a failure
message.
unit front panel. The terrain/obstacle database may
be downloaded via the intenet and the card reprogrammed using a USB programmer available from
Garmin. Contact Garmin at 800-800-1020 or at www.
garmin.com for more information.
To update the terrain or obstacle database:
1.
Acquire a new terrain data card from
Garmin.
2.
Turn off the power to the 500W Series unit.
3.
Remove the old terrain data card from and
insert the new card into the right-most slot of
the 500W Series unit.
4.
Turn on the 500W Series unit and verify that the
TERRAIN system passes the self-test. The “TER
TEST” annunciator will clear after checking and
no failure message appears.
Terrain Database Information
Database Updates
Terrain/Obstacle databases are updated periodically with the latest terrain and obstacle data. Visit the
Garmin website to check for newer versions of terrain/
obstacle databases. Compare database cycle numbers
to determine if a newer version is available.
The database update process includes either
reprogramming or replacing the database card and
inserting the updated card in the right card slot on the
190-00357-00 Rev C
47
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Alerts
Terrain/Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage
TERRAIN Alerts
The following describes the area of coverage available in each database. Regional definitions may change
without notice.
TERRAIN alerts are issued when flight conditions
meet parameters that are set within the TERRAIN
system software algorithms. When an alert is issued,
visual annunciations are displayed. Annunciations
appear in a dedicated field in the lower left corner of
the display.
Database
Coverage Area
Latitudes: N 75° to S 60°
Worldwide (WW)
Longitudes: W 180° to E 180°
Limited to the United States plus
United States (US) some areas of Canada, Mexico,
Caribbean, and the Pacific.
Alaska, Austria, Belgium, Canada*,
Caribbean*, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Hawaii, Iceland,
US/Europe
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania,
Mexico*, Netherlands, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, United
Kingdom, United States
* Indicates partial coverage
CAUTION: Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included
in the Obstacle Database. It is very important to note
that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the Obstacle Database.
Navigation Database
It is therefore important to also have the latest
Navigation Database installed to ensure correct Terrain
alerting.
48
TERRAIN Annunciation Field
Pop-up Terrain Alert
Pop-up Alerts
On any page except the TERRAIN Page, when a
terrain or obstacle alert is issued, a pop-up window is
displayed with the appropriate alert.
To acknowledge the pop-up alert and return to
the currently viewed page:
Press the CLR key.
To acknowledge the pop-up alert and quickly
display the TERRAIN Page:
Press the ENT key.
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Alerts
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
The unit will issue terrain alerts not only when the
aircraft altitude is below the terrain elevation but also
when the aircraft is projected to come within minimum
clearance values of the terrain. This alerting, called
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA), is also
provided for obstacles. Any potential impact points will
be depicted on the display.
FLTA Severity Levels
Minimum Terrain Clearance Values
1.0 NM of the runway.
Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
The TERRAIN system issues a Premature Descent
Alert (PDA) when the system detects that the aircraft
is significantly below the normal approach path to a
runway.
PDA Severity Levels
CAUTION — The above annunciation and pop-up
terrain alert are displayed during a PDA alert.
“TERRAIN AHEAD” alert (flashing)—Similarly, an
“OBSTACLE AHEAD’’ alert is also provided.
Level Flight
700 ft.
350 ft.
150 ft.
100 ft.
PDA ends when the aircraft is either:
• 0.5 NM from the runway threshold
OR
• is below an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within
1.0 NM of the threshold.
“TERRAIN ADVISORY” advisory—Similarly, an
“OBSTACLE ADVISORY” alert is also provided.
Phase of Flight
En Route
Terminal
Approach
Departure
NOTE: During the final approach phase of flight, FLTA
alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is
below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or is below 125 feet AGL while within
Descending
500 ft.
300 ft.
100 ft.
100 ft.
190-00357-00 Rev C
49
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Alerts
(EIGHT!BOVE4ERRAIN&EET
0$!!LERTING!REA
2UNWAY
4HRESHOLD
$ISTANCE&ROM$ESTINATION!IRPORTNM
Premature Descent Alerting (PDA) Threshold
TERRAIN Failure Alert
“TERRAIN Not Available” Alert
The TERRAIN system continually monitors
several system-critical items, such as database validity,
hardware status, and GPS status. Should the system
detect a failure, a message is annunciated “TERRAIN
has failed”.
The TERRAIN system requires a 3D GPS
navigation solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution
become degraded, or if the aircraft is out of the
database coverage area, the annunciation “TERRAIN
NOT AVAILABLE” is displayed on the TERRAIN Page.
“TERRAIN has failed” message
“TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE” display
50
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Alerts
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
Description
None
TERRAIN has failed
None
TERRAIN has been inhibited
None
TERRAIN not available due to degraded navigation solution or
the aircraft is outside of the database coverage area.
Terrain FLTA advisory generated by predicted or present aircraft
altitude being below minimum clearance values. Unless there is
a change in conditions a TERRAIN AHEAD alert may be
generated.
(FLASHING)
(FLASHING)
Terrain FLTA alert generated by predicted or present aircraft
altitude being below minimum clearance values.
Obstacle FLTA advisory generated by predicted or present
aircraft altitude being below minimum clearance values. Unless
there is a change in conditions a OBSTACLE AHEAD alert may
be generated.
(FLASHING)
(FLASHING)
Obstacle FLTA alert generated by predicted or present aircraft
altitude being below minimum clearance values.
PDA alert when the aircraft is significantly below the normal
approach path to the runway.
TERRAIN Alerts Summary
190-00357-00 Rev C
51
2 - NAV PAGES
Terrain Alerts
Blank Page
52
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
NAVCOM Page
NAVCOM Page
The NAVCOM Page provides a list of the airport
communication and navigation frequencies at your
departure, en route and arrival airports. The NAVCOM
Page makes selection of the frequencies you’ll need
along your flight plan quick and convenient. If you do
not have an active flight plan with a departure airport,
the NAVCOM Page displays the frequencies for the
airport nearest your departure position.
Departure, En Route
or Arrival Airport
Frequency
Type
To select a frequency list for a departure, en route
or arrival airport:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
on the airport identifier field (top line on the
NAVCOM Page).
3.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
airport and press ENT.
Assigned Frequency
and Usage Information (when applicable)
The NAVCOM Page lists available frequencies for your departure, en route and arrival
airports.
Information is
available
NOTE: The NAVCOM Page in the NAV group is the
fourth page when the 500W-series unit installation includes connection to traffic and/or weather information
sources. See the 400W/500W Series Display Interfaces
Pilot's Guide Addendum.
190-00357-00 Rev C
53
2 - NAV PAGES
NAVCOM Page
To scroll through the list of frequencies:
To view usage restrictions for a frequency:
1.
Activate the cursor, if not already active, by
pressing the small right knob.
1.
2.
Turn the large right knob to move the cursor
through the list of frequencies. If there are more
frequencies in the list than can be displayed on
the screen, a scroll bar along the right-hand
side of the screen indicates the part of the list
that is currently being displayed.
Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
on the “Info?” designation directly in front of
the desired frequency.
2.
Press ENT to display the restriction information.
Highlight “Info?” adjacent to the desired
frequency and press ENT to display usage
restrictions for the corresponding frequency.
The scroll bar along the right-hand side
of the page indicates the length of the
NAVCOM frequency list and what portion of
the list is currently being displayed.
3.
3.
To place a frequency in the standby field of the
COM or VLOC window, highlight the desired
frequency (using the large right knob) and
press ENT. Available in the GNS 530W only.
Some listed frequencies may include designations
for limited usage, as follows:
“TX” - transmit only
“RX” - receive only
“PT” - part time frequency
If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions, the frequency is preceded by an “Info?” designation.
54
190-00357-00 Rev C
To return to the NAVCOM Page, press ENT.
2 - NAV PAGES
Satellite Status Page
Satellite Status Page
The Satellite Status Page (the last NAV page)
provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions,
including current satellite coverage, GPS receiver
status, position accuracy, and displays your present
position (by default, in latitude and longitude) and
altitude. The Satellite Status Page also displays the current UTC time at the bottom center of the page. The
altitude field (ALT) is user-selectable to configure the
page to your own preferences and current navigation
needs.
Signal
Strength Bars
As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal
strength bar appears for each satellite in view, with the
appropriate satellite number (01-32, WAAS satellites will have higher numbers) underneath each bar.
The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three
stages:
• No signal strength bars — the receiver is looking
for the satellites indicated.
Sky View
Current GPS Receiver
Horizontal Figure
of satellite UTC Time Status
of Merit and Vertipositions
cal Figure of Merit
Estimated Position Uncertainty
Satellite acquired,
used for position
fix, and has differential corrections
Satellite
Numbers
“INTEG”
Annunciator Excluded Acquiring
Satellite
(flagged when
Satellite,
acquired
Satellite
position not
not ready and used for
valid)
for use
position fix
Current Page in NAV
Group
(page position
depends on options;
see 400W/500W
Series Display
Interfaces Pilot's
Guide Addendum)
The Satellite Status Page is helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. You may wish to
refer to this page occasionally to monitor GPS receiver
performance and establish a normal pattern for system
operation. Should problems occur at a later date, you
may find it helpful to have an established baseline
from which to compare.
When the 500W-series unit is first powered
on, an “Acquiring” status appears at the top
of the page and no signal strength bars are
displayed.
• Hollow signal strength bars — the receiver has
found the satellite(s) and is collecting data.
• Cross-hatch cyan signal strength bars — the
receiver has found the satellite(s) but it has been
excluded by the FDE program as a faulty satellite.
• Solid cyan signal strength bars — the receiver has
collected the necessary data, but is not using the
satellite in the position solution.
• Solid green signal strength bars — the receiver
has collected the necessary data and the satellite is
being used in the position solution.
The “D” character inside the bars indicates differential corrections (e.g. WAAS) are being used for that
satellite.
The Time and other data may not be displayed
until the unit has acquired enough satellites for a fix.
190-00357-00 Rev C
55
2 - NAV PAGES
Satellite Status Page
Turn the small right knob to display the list
of available data items. Continue turning the
small right knob to select the desired data
item from the list.
3.
As satellites are received, the status changes
to “3D Navigation”. 3D Navigation includes
altitude.
The sky view display at the top left corner of the
page shows the satellites currently in view as well as
their respective positions. The outer circle of the sky
view represents the horizon (with north at the top
of the circle); the inner circle represents 45° above
the horizon and the center point shows the position
directly overhead.
To change the user-selectable data field:
Select a different data type from the list using
the small right knob.
5.
Press ENT to select the desired data item and
return to the position page.
Press the small right knob momentarily to
remove the cursor from the page.
1.
Press MENU to display the Satellite Status Page
Options menu.
6.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Change Fields?” and press ENT.
To restore the user-selectable data field factory
default setting:
1.
Press MENU to display the Satellite Status Page
Options menu.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Restore
Defaults?” and press ENT.
By default, current altitude (ALT) is displayed
in the lower right corner of the page. This
field is user selectable using the “Change
Fields?” option.
56
NOTE: Do not rely solely on MSA as an absolute
measure of safe altitude. Consult current charts and
NOTAMs for your area.
190-00357-00 Rev C
2 - NAV PAGES
Dead Reckoning
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission
that must be collected (hollow signal strength bar)
before the satellite may be used for navigation (solid
signal strength bar). Once the GPS receiver has determined your position, the 500W-series unit indicates
your position, altitude, track and ground speed. The
GPS receiver status field also displays the following
messages under the appropriate conditions:
• Searching Sky —
The GPS receiver is searching the sky for ANY visible satellites. You are also informed of this status
with a “Searching the Sky” message.
• Acquiring Sat —
The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for navigation. In this mode, the receiver uses satellite orbital
data (collected continuously from the satellites) and
last known position to determine the satellites that
should be in view.
Dead Reckoning
Dead reckoning is the process of continuing navigation using your last known position and speed after
a loss of GPS navigation while on an active flight plan.
CAUTION: Navigation using dead reckoning is therefore only an estimate and should not be used as the
sole means of navigation. Use other means of navigation, if possible.
Dead reckoning becomes active after a loss of GPS
position while you are navigating using an active flight
plan.
A pop-up message will appear and you must clear
the message before continuing operation.
• 3D Navigation —
The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and
computes altitude using satellite data.
• 3D Differential Navigation— The GPS receiver is
in 3D navigation mode and differential corrections
are being used.
The Satellite Status Page also indicates the accuracy of the position fix, using Horizontal Figure of
Merit (HFOM), Vertical Figure of Merit (VFOM), and
Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU). HFOM and
VFOM represent the 95% confidence levels in horizontal and vertical accuracy. The lowest numbers are
the best accuracy and the highest numbers are worse.
EPU is the horizontal position error estimated by the
Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) algorithm, in feet
or meters.
The ownship icon color is changed to yellow. The To/
From flag is removed from the CDI. The Dead Reckoning annunciator (DR) appears on the left side of the
map display when GPS position is unavailable and the
unit is in Dead Reckoning mode. All external outputs
dependent on GPS position are flagged.
Terrain will be noted as not available and new terrain
advisory pop-ops will not occur. Traffic and Stormscope information will not be shown on the Map page,
but will continue to be available on their own dedicated pages. XM weather will still be available on the
Map page.
190-00357-00 Rev C
57
2 - NAV PAGES
Dead Reckoning
Dead Reckoning mode will continue until GPS position is restored, when GPS navigation is restored Dead
Reckoning mode is exited. The DR annunciations
will be removed and GPS information will be used to
compute navigation related information for the current
flight phase.
Dead Reckoning is only allowed in En Route and
Oceanic flight modes. If the unit is in a Terminal or
Approach flight mode when Dead Reckoning takes
place, “No GPS Position” will be displayed on the map
pages and all navigation data will be dashed. If you are
operating in Dead Reckoning mode and a transition to
Terminal or Approach flight modes would occur from
the projected Dead Reckoning position, Dead Reckoning mode will be discontinued. “No GPS Position” will
be displayed on the map pages and all navigation data
will be dashed.
58
190-00357-00 Rev C
3 - DIRECT-TO
Selecting a Destination
Section 3
Direct-To Navigation
The 500W-series direct-to function provides a quick
method of setting a course to a destination waypoint.
Once a direct-to is activated, the 500W-series unit
establishes a point-to-point course line (geodesic path)
from your present position to the selected direct-to
destination. Navigation data on the various NAV pages
provides steering guidance until the direct-to is cancelled or replaced by a new destination.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the name of the destination waypoint. Press
ENT once the name has been fully entered.
To select a direct-to destination:
1.
Press the direct-to key. The Select Direct-to
Waypoint Page appears, with the waypoint
identifier field highlighted.
Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint
and ENT (again) to activate the direct-to function.
3.
If you’re navigating to a waypoint and get off
course, the direct-to function may also be used to recenter the CDI (HSI) needle and proceed to the same
waypoint.
To re-center the CDI (HSI) needle to the same
destination waypoint:
Press the direct-to key, followed by ENT
twice.
1.
Pressing the direct-to key displays the Select
Direct-to Waypoint Page.
2.
Use the small and large right knobs to
enter the identifier of the desired destination
waypoint.
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: When navigating an approach with the
missed approach point (MAP) as the current destination, re-centering the CDI (HSI) needle with
the direct-to key cancels the approach.
59
3 - DIRECT-TO
Selecting by Facility or City
Selecting a Destination by Facility Name or
City
In addition to selecting a destination by identifier,
the Select Direct-to Waypoint Page also allows you to
select airports, VORs and NDBs by facility name or
city location. If duplicate entries exist for the entered
facility name or city, additional entries may be viewed
by continuing to turn the small right knob during
the selection process (see Sec 6 WPT Pages - Duplicate
waypoints for more information).
Identifier, Symbol
and Region
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
facility name (second line; see above) or the
city (third line; see above) field.
3.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the facility name or city location of the desired
destination waypoint. As you spell the facility
name or city, the 500W-series Spell’N’Find
feature selects the first entry in the database
based upon the characters you have entered
up to that point.
Flight Plan
Field
Facility Name
City
Nearest Airport
Field
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the city name. Continue turning the small
right knob to view any additional listings for
the selected city.
To select a direct-to destination by facility name
or city:
1.
Press the direct-to key. The Select Direct-to
Waypoint Page appears, with the waypoint
identifier field highlighted.
4.
Continue turning the small right knob to
scroll through any additional database listings
for the selected facility name or city. If you scroll
past the desired waypoint, you can also scroll
backwards with the small right knob.
5.
Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint
and ENT (again) to activate the direct-to function.
Select the third line on the Select Direct-to
Waypoint Page to choose your destination
waypoint (airport, VOR, NDB) by city name.
60
190-00357-00 Rev C
3 - DIRECT-TO
Flight Plan / Nearest Waypoints
Selecting a Destination from the Active Flight
Plan
Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct-To Destination
If you’re navigating an active flight plan, any
waypoint contained in the flight plan may be selected
as a direct-to destination from the Select Direct-to
Waypoint page (see Section 4, for more information on
flight plans).
The Select Direct-to Waypoint Page always displays
the nearest airports (from your present position) on
the NRST field. Navigating directly to a nearby airport
is always just a few simple steps away (nearby airports
may also be selected as direct-to destinations using the
steps described in Sec 7 NRST Pages - Navigating to a
Nearby Waypoint).
The flight plan (FPL) field allows you to
select any active flight plan waypoint as your
current destination waypoint.
The nearest airport (NRST) field allows you
to select any of the 25 nearest airports as
your current destination waypoint.
To select a direct-to destination from the active
flight plan:
Press the direct-to key. The Select Direct-to
Waypoint Page appears, with the waypoint
identifier field highlighted.
1.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
flight plan (FPL) field.
3.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
showing all waypoints in the active flight
plan.
Continue turning the small right knob to
scroll through the list and highlight the desired
waypoint.
4.
Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint and
ENT (again) to activate the direct-to function.
5.
To select a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1.
Press the direct-to key. The select direct-to
waypoint page appears, with the waypoint
identifier field highlighted.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
nearest airport (NRST) field.
3.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
showing up to nine nearby airports.
4.
Continue turning the small right knob to
scroll through the list and highlight the desired
airport.
5.
Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint
and ENT (again) to activate the direct-to function.
NOTE: Performing a Direct-To to the MAP of an active
approach will cancel approach mode.
190-00357-00 Rev C
61
3 - DIRECT-TO
Direct-to Shortcuts
Shortcuts
Shortcuts are available when using the direct-to
key, allowing you to bypass the use of the small and
large right knobs to enter the destination waypoint’s
identifier. A direct-to can be performed from any page
displaying a single waypoint identifier (such as the
WPT pages for airports and navaids) by simply pressing direct-to and ENT. For pages that display a list of
waypoints (e.g., the Nearest Airport Page), you must
highlight the desired waypoint with the cursor before
pressing the direct-to key.
When a single waypoint is displayed
on-screen, select it as your destination by
pressing direct-to. When a list of waypoints is
displayed, press the small right knob to display a cursor, highlight the desired waypoint,
then press direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected from
the Map Page by panning to the desired destination
location and pressing direct-to and ENT (twice). If no
airport, navaid or user waypoint exists at the desired
location, a waypoint named “+MAP” is automatically
created at the location of the panning pointer.
To select a direct-to destination from the map
page:
1.
From the Map Page, press the small right
knob to display a panning pointer.
2.
Turn the small and large right knobs to place
the panning pointer at the desired destination
location.
Use the panning pointer to select your destination directly from the map.
3.
If the panning pointer is placed on an existing
airport, navaid or user waypoint, the waypoint
name is highlighted. Press direct-to and ENT
twice to navigate to the waypoint.
4.
If the panning pointer is placed on an open
location, press direct-to and ENT twice to
create a “MAP” waypoint and navigate to it.
To select an on-screen waypoint as a direct-to
destination:
62
1.
If a single airport, navaid or user waypoint is
displayed on-screen, press direct-to, then press
ENT twice.
2.
If a list of waypoints is displayed on-screen, press
the small right knob to activate the cursor, turn
the large right knob to highlight the desired
waypoint, then press direct-to followed by
ENT twice.
190-00357-00 Rev C
3 - DIRECT-TO
Cancelling / Manual Course
Cancelling Direct-To Navigation
Specifying a Course to a Waypoint
Once a direct-to is activated, the 500W-series unit
provides navigation guidance to the selected destination until the direct-to is either replaced with a new
direct-to or flight plan, or cancelled, or if the unit is
turned off.
When you perform a direct-to, the 500W-series
unit sets a direct geodetic course to your selected
destination. You can also manually define the course to
your destination, using the course field (“CRS”) on the
Select Direct-to Waypoint Page.
To cancel a direct-to, select a new direct-to
destination, activate a flight plan or select
the “Cancel Direct-To NAV?” option.
The “CRS” field allows you to define the
course to a direct-to destination waypoint.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the desired course.
To cancel a direct-to:
1.
Press the direct-to key to display the Select
Direct-to Waypoint Page.
To manually define the direct-to course:
1.
Press the direct-to key.
2.
Press MENU to display the Direct-to Options
menu.
2.
Use the small and large right knobs to select
the destination waypoint.
3.
With “Cancel Direct-To NAV?” highlighted,
press ENT. If a flight plan is still active, the
500W-series unit resumes navigating the flight
plan along the closest leg.
3.
Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint,
then turn the large right knob to highlight
the course (“CRS”) field.
4.
Turn the small and large right knobs to select
the desired course and press ENT.
5.
Press ENT again to begin navigation using the
selected destination and course.
6.
To reselect a direct course from present position (or select a new manually-defined course),
simply press direct-to, followed by ENT
twice.
190-00357-00 Rev C
63
3 - DIRECT-TO
Selecting Direct-To a Holding Pattern
4.
You may select a Direct-To course to a holding pattern that is in your flight plan.
To set a direct-to course to a holding pattern:
64
1.
Press the FPL key to reach the active flight plan
page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor. Turn the large right knob to highlight
the hold leg of the flight plan.
3.
Press direct-to. “Activate” will be highlighted.
Press ENT to activate a course Direct-To the
holding pattern. Or, press CLR to cancel the
process.
190-00357-00 Rev C
The holding pattern will now be set as your
next waypoint.
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Creating Flight Plans
Section 4
Flight Plans
The 500W-series unit lets you create up to 20 different flight plans, with up to 31 waypoints in each flight
plan. The flight plan (FPL) page group consists of two
pages, accessed by pressing the FPL key. The flight plan
pages allow you to create, edit and copy flight plans.
Active Flight Plan
Highlight the point in the existing flight plan
where you wish to add the new waypoint. If
an existing waypoint is highlighted, the new
waypoint is placed directly in front of it.
Flight Plan Catalog
Flight Plan Catalog
The Flight Plan Catalog allows you to create, edit,
activate, delete and copy flight plans. Flight plans
numbered from 1 through 19 are used to save flight
plans for future use. “Flight plan 00” is reserved
exclusively for the active flight plan currently in use
for navigation. Any time you activate a flight plan, a
copy of the flight plan is automatically transferred to
“flight plan 0” and overwrites any previously active
flight plan.
5.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the identifier of the new waypoint and press
ENT.
6.
Once all changes have been made, press the
small right knob to return to the Flight Plan
Catalog.
Flight Plan Editing
To add a waypoint to an existing flight plan:
1.
Press FPL and turn the small right knob to
display the Flight Plan Catalog.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press ENT.
4.
Turn the large right knob to select the point
where you wish to add the new waypoint. If
an existing waypoint is highlighted, the new
waypoint is placed directly in front of this
waypoint.
190-00357-00 Rev C
65
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Editing Flight Plans
To delete a waypoint from an existing flight plan:
1.
Press FPL and turn the small right knob to
display the Flight Plan .
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press ENT.
4.
Turn the large right knob to select the
waypoint you wish to delete and press CLR to
display a “REMOVE WAYPOINT” confirmation
window.
Highlight the waypoint you wish to delete
and press CLR to display the “REMOVE
WAYPOINT” confirmation window.
5.
With “Yes” highlighted, press ENT to remove
the waypoint.
6.
Once all changes have been made, press the
small right knob to return to the Flight Plan
Catalog.
To change the comment line for an existing flight
plan:
The comment line at the top of the page
can be edited to change the name/comment
assigned to the flight plan.
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog, press the small
right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to select the comment line at the top of the screen.
4.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the new comment. Press ENT when finished.
5.
Once all changes have been made, press the
small right knob to return to the Flight Plan
Catalog.
A one-line user comment may be added to any
flight plan and is displayed on the Flight Plan Catalog,
next to the flight plan number. By default, as the flight
plan is being created, the comment shows the first and
last waypoints in the flight plan.
66
190-00357-00 Rev C
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Activating / Inverting
Flight Plan Catalog Options
The following options are available for the Flight
Plan Catalog:
• Activate Flight Plan
• Invert and Activate Flight Plan
• Create New Flight Plan
• Crossfill
• Copy Flight Plan
• Delete Flight Plan
• Delete All Flight Plans
• Sort List by Number/Comment
Activating Flight Plans
Once a flight plan is defined through the Flight
Plan Catalog (using the steps previously outlined), it
may be activated for navigation. Activating the flight
plan copies it into “flight plan 00” and overwrites any
previous information at that location.
Activate Flight Plan? allows you to select the flight plan
for navigation guidance.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press MENU to display
the Flight Plan Catalog Options.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Activate Flight Plan?” and press ENT.
Inverting Flight Plans
Invert & Activate FPL? allows you to reverse the
highlighted flight plan and select it for navigation
guidance back to your original departure point.
To activate an existing flight plan in reverse order:
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog, press the small
right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press MENU to display
the Flight Plan Catalog Options.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Invert
& Activate FPL?” and press ENT. The original
flight plan remains intact in its Flight Plan
Catalog storage location.
Create New Flight Plan
Create New Flight Plan? allows you to create a new
flight plan. The new flight plan will be saved in the
Flight Plan Catalog.
To create a new flight plan:
“Activate Flight Plan?” selects the highlighted flight plan for
navigation guidance. “Invert & Activate FPL?” reverses the
sequence of the highlighted flight plan, then activates it for
navigation guidance.
1.
Press FPL and turn the small right knob to
display the Flight Plan Catalog.
2.
Press MENU to display the Flight Plan Catalog
Options.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Create
New Flight Plan?” and press ENT.
To activate an existing flight plan:
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog, press the small
right knob to activate the cursor.
190-00357-00 Rev C
67
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Copying / Deleting
Crossfill
Crossfill? allows you to transfer a direct-to destination, the active flight plan, any stored flight plan or
user waypoints to a second 400W-series or 500Wseries Garmin unit. Some crossfill operations can be
done automatically. If the crossfill method for both
units is set to “auto”, a change in the direct-to destination or active flight plan on one unit can also be seen
on the other.
From the Flight Plan Catalog, press MENU to
display the options menu and select “Create
New Flight Plan?”.
4.
5.
To crossfill information between two 500W-series
(or 400W-series) Garmin units:
A blank flight plan page appears for the first
empty storage location. Use the small and
large right knobs to enter the identifier of
the departure waypoint and press ENT.
Repeat step #4 above to enter the identifier
for each additional flight plan waypoint.
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog, press MENU to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Options.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the
“Crossfill?” option and press ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to select the
“Method” field.
4.
Turn the small right knob to select “Auto” or
“Manual” and press ENT. “Auto” automatically transfers the active flight plan or direct-to
selection to another 400W- or 500W-series
Garmin unit, without user intervention.
5.
If “Manual” is selected, turn the large right
knob to select the “Transfer” field, then turn
the small right knob to select the type of
information to transfer between units (Active
Flight Plan, Flight Plan, All User Waypoints or
User Waypoint). When “Flight Plan” or “User
Waypoint” is selected, a second field appears
to the immediate right of the “Transfer” field.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the number of the flight plan or the name of
the user waypoint you wish to transfer.
6.
The “Cross-Side” field allows you to designate
the sending and receiving units in a crossfill
operation. Turn the large right knob to select
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the identifier of each flight plan waypoint.
6.
68
Once all waypoints have been entered, press
the small right knob to return to the Flight
Plan Catalog.
190-00357-00 Rev C
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Flight Plan Catalog Options
the “Cross-Side” field, then turn the small
right knob to select “To” or “From”. Press
ENT to confirm the selection.
7.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Initiate Transfer?” and press ENT to transfer the
selected data.
Use the “Copy Flight Plan?” option to save
a copy of a flight plan to another memory
location. This is useful for saving the active
flight plan, or to save a stored flight plan
before editing.
Once “Initiate Transfer?” is selected, a progress bar at the
bottom of the page indicates the status of the crossfill transfer
until completed.
Copying Flight Plans
Copy Flight Plan? allows you to copy the selected
flight plan to a new flight plan location. The copy
function is useful for duplicating an existing flight plan
before making changes.
If you wish to save a flight plan currently located
in “flight plan 00”, copy it to an open catalog location
(1-19) before the flight plan is cancelled, overwritten
or erased.
NOTE: Once a flight plan is activated, it is copied to
“flight plan 00” and overwrites the previous contents
of the flight plan memory location.
To copy a flight plan to another Flight Plan Catalog location:
1a. From the Active Flight Plan Page: press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Options
window.
or
1b. From the Flight Plan Catalog: press the small
right knob to activate the cursor, turn the
large right knob to highlight the flight plan
you wish to copy, then press MENU to display
the Flight Plan Catalog Options.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Copy
Flight Plan?” and press ENT.
3.
By default, the next empty catalog location
is offered. To select a different location, turn
the large right knob to select the flight plan
number, use the small and large right knobs
to enter a different number and press ENT.
4.
With “Yes?” highlighted, press ENT to copy
the flight plan.
190-00357-00 Rev C
69
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Flight Plan Catalog Options
Deleting Flight Plans
Delete All Flight Plans
Once you are finished with a flight plan, it can
easily be deleted from the Flight Plan Catalog or the
Active Flight Plan Page.
Delete All Flight Plans? allows you to remove all
flight plans from memory at one time.
Delete Flight Plan? allows you to remove the
selected flight plan from memory. Deleting a flight plan
does not delete the individual waypoints contained
in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint
memory.
Select “Delete Flight Plan?” to remove the
highlighted flight plan from memory. “Delete
All Flight Plans?” removes all flight plans
from memory.
To delete all flight plans:
1.
Select the “Delete All Flight Plans?” option
from the Flight Plan Catalog Options and press
ENT.
2.
A confirmation window appears. With “Yes?”
highlighted, press ENT.
Select “Delete Flight Plan?” to remove the
designated flight plan from memory.
To delete a flight plan:
1a. From the Active Flight Plan Page: Press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Options
window.
or
1b. From the Flight Plan Catalog: Press the small
right knob to activate the cursor, turn the
large right knob to highlight the flight plan
you wish to delete, then press MENU to display
the Flight Plan Catalog Options.
70
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Delete
Flight Plan?” and press ENT.
3.
With “Yes?” highlighted, press ENT to delete
the flight plan.
Sort List By Number/Comment
Sort List By Number?/Sort List by Comment?
allows you to select between a Flight Plan Catalog
sorted numerically by the flight plan number or sorted
alphanumerically based upon the comment assigned
to each flight plan. When either option is selected,
the other option appears on the Flight Plan Catalog
Options window.
To sort the catalog listing by number or comment:
1.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Select the “Sort List By Number?” or “Sort List
By Comment?” option (whichever is currently
displayed) from the Flight Plan Catalog Options
and press ENT.
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Active Flight Plan Options
Active Flight Plan
The Active Flight Plan Page provides information
and editing functions for “flight plan 0” — the flight
plan currently in use for navigation. Once you have
activated a flight plan, the Active Flight Plan Page
shows each waypoint for the flight plan, along with
the desired track (DTK), distance (DIS) for each leg
and cumulative distance (CUM). The data fields are
user-selectable and may be changed to display estimated time of arrival (ETA) or estimated time en route
(ETE).
Change the displayed data using the “Change Fields?” option.
Highlight the data field you wish to change and turn the small
right knob to display available data types.
5.
Press the small right knob to remove the cursor.
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan
Page Options window.
To restore factory default settings for data fields
on the Active Flight Plan Page:
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Restore Defaults?” and press ENT.
Active Flight Plan Options
The following options (some covered on the preceding pages) are available for the active flight plan:
• Activate Leg
• Crossfill
• Copy Flight Plan
• Invert Flight Plan
• Delete Flight Plan
• Select Approach
• Select Arrival
• Select Departure
• Remove Approach
• Remove Arrival
• Remove Departure
• Closest Point of Flight Plan
• Parallel Track
• Change Fields
• Restore Defaults
2.
The Active Flight Plan Page shows waypoint
names and data for the route currently being
used for navigation guidance.
To change a data field on the Active Flight Plan
Page:
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan
Page Options window.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Change Fields?” and press ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the field
you wish to change.
4.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
data item and press ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
71
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Active Flight Plan Options
Activate Leg
Copy Flight Plan
Activate Leg? activates/reactivates the flight plan
and selects the highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the
leg which is currently used for navigation guidance).
Copy Flight Plan? copies the active flight plan
to a Flight Plan Catalog location. The copy function
is useful for duplicating the active flight plan before
making changes. See the description on a previous
page in the Flight Plan section.
Invert Flight Plan
Invert Flight Plan? reverses the active flight plan.
See the description on a previous page in the Flight
Plan section.
Delete Flight Plan
“Activate Leg?” selects the highlighted flight plan leg as the
leg currently in use for navigation guidance (even if it isn’t the
closest leg).
To activate a flight plan along a specific leg:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
small right knob to activate the cursor and
turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired destination waypoint.
2.
Press MENU, select the “Activate Leg?” option
from the Active Flight Plan Page Options and
press ENT.
3.
A confirmation window appears. With “Activate?” highlighted, press ENT.
Delete Flight Plan? allows you to remove all
waypoints from the active flight plan. (Deleting a
flight plan does not delete the waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user
waypoint memory.)
Crossfill
Crossfill? allows you to transfer the active flight
plan between two 500W-series units in a dual unit
installation. See the description on a previous page in
the Flight Plan section.
72
190-00357-00 Rev C
“Delete Flight Plan?” cancels navigation and
removes the active flight plan from memory.
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Active Flight Plan Options
Select Approach
Select Approach? allows you to select a published
instrument approach for the destination airport, or
replace the current approach with a new selection.
(In many cases, you’ll find it more convenient
to select approaches using the PROC key — as
described in Section 5 - Procedures.)
Published instrument approaches can be
selected and used from the Active Flight
Plan Options, or by pressing the PROC key.
The “Select Approach?” option appears in
both places.
5.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Load?”
or “Activate?” and press ENT. “Load?” adds
the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the approach for navigation guidance. This allows you to continue navigating
the original flight plan until cleared for the
approach, but keeps the approach available
for quick activation when needed. “Activate?”
adds the approach to the flight plan and begins
navigating the approach course.
6.
For precision approaches, and non-precision
approaches not approved for GPS, a reminder
window appears indicating that GPS guidance
on such approaches is strictly for monitoring
only. To confirm this reminder, highlight “Yes?”
and press ENT.
Select Arrival
To select an approach for a direct-to or flight plan
destination airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press
MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page
Options.
2.
Highlight the “Select Approach?” option and
press ENT.
3.
A window appears listing the available
approaches for your destination airport. Turn
the small right knob to highlight the desired
approach and press ENT.
4.
final course segment of the approach and will
provide navigation guidance to intercept this
final course.)
A second window appears listing available
transitions for the approach. Turn the small
right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press ENT. (The “Vectors”
option assumes you will receive vectors to the
Select Arrival? allows you to select a published
standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport, or replace the current arrival with a new
selection. (See Section 5 - Procedures for information
on selecting arrivals using the PROC key.) Arrivals are
not available for all airports, in which case the arrival
windows will show “NONE.”
To select an arrival for a direct-to or flight plan
destination airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press
MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page
Options.
2.
Highlight the “Select Arrival?” option and press
ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
73
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Active Flight Plan Options
Select Departure
3.
4.
5.
Select Departure? allows you to select a published standard instrument departure (SID) for the
departure airport, or replace the current departure
with a new selection. When using a direct-to, the
500W-series unit uses the nearest airport as a reference when displaying available departures. (See
Section 5 - Procedures for information on selecting
departures using the PROC key.) Departures are
not available for all airports, in which case the
departure windows will show “NONE.”
“Select Arrival?” and “Select Departure?”
allow you to select and use published arrival
routes (STARs) and published instrument
departures (SIDs).
To select a departure for the departure airport:
A window appears listing the available arrivals
for your destination airport. Turn the small
right knob to select the desired arrival and
press ENT.
A second window appears listing available
transitions for the arrival. Turn the small
right knob to highlight the desired transition
waypoint and press ENT.
A third window appears listing available runways
for the arrival. Turn the small right knob to
highlight the desired runway and press ENT.
Once the arrival or departure is selected, a
window appears to select the desired transition waypoint.
6.
74
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press
MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page
Options.
2.
Highlight the “Select Departure?” option from
the Active Flight Plan Page Options and press
ENT.
3.
A window appears listing the available departures for your departure airport. Turn the small
right knob to select the desired departure and
press ENT.
4.
A second window appears listing available
transitions for the departure. Turn the small
right knob to highlight the desired transition
waypoint and press ENT.
5.
A third window appears listing available runways for the departure. Turn the small right
knob to highlight the desired runway and press
ENT.
6.
With “Load?” highlighted, press ENT. The
departure is now inserted into your flight
plan.
With “Load?” highlighted, press ENT. The
arrival is now inserted into your flight plan.
190-00357-00 Rev C
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Active Flight Plan Options
Remove Approach, Arrival, or Departure
Closest Point of FPL
Remove Approach? deletes the currently selected
approach from the active flight plan. Remove Arrival?
deletes the current Arrival (STAR) from the active
flight plan. Remove Departure? deletes the current
departure (SID) from the active flight plan.
Closest Point of FPL? calculates the bearing and
closest distance at which a flight plan passes from
a reference waypoint. May also be used to create a
new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.
To remove an approach, arrival or departure from
the active flight plan:
1.
Press MENU and turn the large right knob
to select the “Remove Approach?”, “Remove
Arrival?” or “Remove Departure?” option from
the active flight plan page options and press
ENT.
To determine the closest point where the active flight plan passes a particular waypoint,
use the “Closest Point of FPL?” option. A
waypoint can be added to the flight plan at
the calculated location.
To determine the closest point, along the active
flight plan, to a selected waypoint:
Approaches, arrivals and departures can all
be removed from the active flight plan by
selecting the corresponding “Remove...”
option.
To remove an approach, arrival or departure from
the active flight plan:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options.
2.
Select the “Remove Approach?”, “Remove
Arrival?” or “Remove Departure?” option and
press ENT.
3.
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press
MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page
Options.
2.
Select the “Closest Point of FPL?” option from
the Active Flight Plan Page Options and press
ENT.
3.
A window appears with the reference waypoint
field highlighted. Use the small and large
right knobs to enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press ENT.
4.
The 500W-series unit displays the bearing
(BRG) and distance (DIST) to the closest point
along the flight plan, from the selected reference waypoint. To create a user waypoint at
this location and add it to the flight plan,
A confirmation window appears listing the procedure you are about to remove. With “Yes?”
highlighted, press ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
75
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Active Flight Plan Options
highlight “Load?” and press ENT. The name
for the new user waypoint is derived from the
identifier of the reference waypoint.
Parallel Track
Parallel Track? allows you to create a parallel
course offset of 1 to 99 NM to the left or right of your
current flight plan. After setting a parallel track to your
current flight plan, a magenta parallel track line will be
drawn offset from the original by the selected distance.
The original course line will be drawn in white. The
aircraft will navigate to the parallel track course line.
When you reach the end of the flight plan, a
message will state “Parallel offset terminating in X
seconds”. The message will be given when the aircraft
reaches the offset distance from the end of the parallel
track. This will give the pilot sufficient time to intercept the original course.
Points to remember with Parallel Track:
• You must have an active flight plan
• The current leg must support parallel track
• Parallel track is not allowed for the active leg of an
approach
• Parallel track is not allowed if the active leg is not a
track-to-fix or direct-to-fix leg
• Parallel track may be allowed but not the selected
offset distance
To set a parallel track to your flight plan.
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan
Page Options window.
North
Course
TO
WPT
BRG
DTK
Select “Parallel Track?” to set a parallel track
to your current flight plan.
Offset
TO
WPT
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Parallel
Track?” and press ENT.
3.
Turn the small and large right knobs to
set the Offset Distance value and then press
ENT.
4.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
Offset Direction.
Parallel Track Distance
FROM
WPT
Offset
FROM
WPT
76
190-00357-00 Rev C
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Active Flight Plan Editing
5.
6.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
Offset Direction and press ENT.
Activate? is highlighted. Press ENT to activate
the selected Parallel Track. Or, press CLR or the
small right knob (CRSR) to cancel Parallel
Track selection.
To cancel a parallel track to your flight plan.
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan
Page Options window.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Parallel
Track?” and press ENT.
3.
“Cancel?” is highlighted. Press ENT.
Change Fields
Change Fields? allows you to select the desired
data items to display on the active flight plan page.
1. With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan
Page Options window.
2. Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Change Fields?” and press ENT. The field
active for selection will flash. Turn the large
right knob to highlight the field to change.
After activating Parallel Track, the flight plan
will show “-P” for each leg to indicate
Parallel Track is active and GPS-PTK will be
annunciated in the lower left corner.
Original
waypoint
Parallel Track
offset waypoint
Original
flight plan
course line
Present
Position
After setting a parallel track to your current
flight plan, a magenta parallel track line will
be drawn offset from the original by the selected distance. The original course line will
be drawn in white. The aircraft will navigate
to the parallel track course line.
Changing fields for the active flight
plan.
3.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Turn the small right knob to open the list of
selections and continue turning it to highlight
the desired selection and then press ENT.
Restore Defaults
77
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Flight Plan Shortcuts
Restore Defaults
2.
Restore Defaults? returns the data items to factory defaults.
1. With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan
Page Options window.
2. Turn the small right knob to highlight
“Restore Defaults?” and then press ENT.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the title
for the approach, departure or arrival you wish
to delete. Titles appear in light blue directly
above the procedure’s waypoints.
3.
Press CLR to display a confirmation window.
4.
With “Yes?” highlighted, press ENT to remove
the selected procedure.
Shortcuts
This same process may also be used to remove
individual waypoints from the active flight plan.
A number of shortcuts are available to save time
when using the Active Flight Plan Page. These shortcuts speed the process of removing approaches, departures and arrivals, and aid in selecting a specific flight
plan leg for navigation guidance.
On the preceding page, options to remove
approaches, departures and arrivals were introduced.
This process may also be completed using the CLR
key, as described below and illustrated at right.
To remove an individual waypoint from
the active flight plan, highlight the
waypoint you wish to remove and press
CLR.
To remove an approach, departure or arrival using
the CLR key:
To remove a waypoint using the CLR key:
To remove an approach, departure
or arrival from the active flight plan,
highlight the procedure name (appears
in light blue text) and press CLR.
1.
78
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
identifier for the waypoint you wish to delete.
Identifiers appear in green text.
3.
Press CLR to display a confirmation window.
4.
With “Yes?” highlighted, press ENT to remove
the selected procedure.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
190-00357-00 Rev C
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Flight Plan Shortcuts
The “Activate Leg?” option is discussed earlier,
which allows you to specify which leg of the flight
plan is currently used for navigation guidance. A
shortcut also exists for this operation, using the
direct-to key.
When using instrument procedures, this feature
can be used not only to activate a specific point-topoint leg, but to also activate a departure, an arrival,
the procedure turn portion of an approach, follow a
DME arc or activate a holding pattern.
Any approach, departure or arrival can be reviewed
on the appropriate airport page in the WPT page
group.
To review a procedure while viewing a flight plan
page:
1.
With the flight plan page displayed, press the
small right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
procedure header and press ENT to select the
WPT page group.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, use the
direct-to key (press twice) to activate a
highlighted route leg...
...including any portion of an instrument
procedure, such as a procedure turn, DME arc
or holding pattern.
To activate a specific leg of the active flight plan:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired destination waypoint.
2.
Press direct-to twice to display an “Activate
Leg” confirmation window.
3.
With “Activate?” highlighted, press ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
79
4 - FLIGHT PLANS
Blank Page
80
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
Approaches/Departures/Arrivals
Section 5 - Procedures Approaches, Departures, & Arrivals
4.
The 500W-series unit allows you to fly non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures. All available
approaches are stored on your Jeppesen NavData® card,
and are automatically updated when you replace the
card with a new one. Subscription information for NavData cards is included in your 500W-series package.
are offered for the nearest airport.)
A second window appears listing the available transitions. Turn the large right knob to
highlight the desired transition waypoint and
press ENT. (The approach “Vectors” option
assumes you will receive vectors to the final
course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final
approach course.)
The Procedures Page is displayed by pressing the
PROC key. The Procedures Page provides direct access
to approaches, departures and arrivals — based upon
the active flight plan or direct-to destination. In either
case, the departure and destination airports must have
published procedures associated with them.
To select an approach, departure or arrival:
1.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page.
You can select a transition waypoint for an approach, or
choose “VECTORS” to provide navigation guidance to the final
approach course.
5.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures Page. Options are
available to select published approaches, arrivals (STARs) and
departures (DPs or SIDs).
2.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Select
Approach?”, “Select Departure?” or “Select
Arrival?” and press ENT.
A window appears listing the available procedures. Turn the large right knob to highlight
the desired procedure and press ENT. (When
a direct-to destination is selected, departures
6.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Load?” or “Activate?” (approaches only)
and press ENT. “Load?” adds the procedure
to the flight plan without immediately using
it for navigation guidance. This allows you to
continue navigating the original flight plan,
but keeps the procedure available on the
Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation
when needed to later activate a departure or
arrival.
For VLOC-based precision approaches and
some non-precision approaches, a reminder
window appears indicating that GPS guidance
on such approaches is strictly for monitoring
only — use the VLOC receiver and external CDI
(or HSI) for primary navigation. To confirm this
reminder, highlight “Yes?” and press ENT.
81
5 - PROCEDURES
Activating Approaches
Not all approaches in the database are approved for
GPS use. As you select an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the
procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some
procedures do not have this designation, meaning that
the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. ILS approaches, for example, must
be flown by tuning the VLOC receiver to the proper
frequency and coupling the VLOC receiver to the
external CDI (or HSI).
2. Turn the large right knob to highlight “Activate Approach?” and press ENT.
Another Procedures Page option allows you to
activate the final course segment of the approach. This
option assumes you will receive vectors to the final
approach course and guides you to intercept the final
course, before reaching the FAF.
To activate the (previously loaded) approach, with
vectors to final:
Once an approach is selected, it may be activated
for navigation from the Procedures Page. Activating
the approach overrides the “en route” portion of
the active flight plan, proceeding directly to the
“approach” portion (for a full approach, directly to the
initial approach fix). Activating the approach also initiates automatic CDI scaling transition as the approach
progresses.
With the full approach “Loaded”, select
“Activate Vectors-To-Final?” to provide
navigation guidance along the final approach
course segment only.
To activate an approach (which was previously
loaded):
1. Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page.
2. Turn the large right knob to highlight “Activate Vectors-To-Final?” and press ENT.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “Load” the full
approach while still some distance away, en route to
the destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use
the steps above to select “Activate Vectors-To-Final”
— which makes the inbound course to the FAF
waypoint active. Otherwise, activate the full approach
using the “Activate Approach?” option.
When an approach is “Loaded”, it is added
to the end of the active flight plan. Prior to
reaching the approach course, select “Activate Approach?” to begin navigation along
the approach course.
1. Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page.
82
If you reactivate the approach currently being
flown using the PROC key, prior to reaching the MAP
a Restart Approach confirmation window appears on
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
Basic Approach Operations
the screen. If you have passed the MAP, the 500Wseries unit proceeds to the transition waypoint without
a restart confirmation.
Annunciation
Description
LPV
Lateral Precision with Vertical guidance (LPV)
approach. Fly to LPV minimums. A yellow
background indicates that the approach is
safe to continue but a downgrade to LNAV
may occur.
L/VNAV
Lateral Navigation and Vertical Navigation
(LNAV/VNAV) approach. Fly to Lnav/Vnav
minimums.
LNAV+V
Non-precision GPS approach with advisory
vertical guidance. Note that some LNAV/VNAV
approaches are not yet marked in the database as such and will show up as LNAV+V. If
the chart shows the approach as Lnav/Vnav,
it can be flown to Lnav/Vnav minimums.
Basic Approach Operations
The 500W series provides precision vertical guidance and non-precision advisory guidance using its
built in GPS receiver. The moving map pages can also
be used as a supplemental aid to situational awareness
for ILS, VOR, and NDB approaches (and non-precision localizer-based approaches), but the appropriate
navigational aid MUST be used for primary approach
course guidance.
Approaches designed specifically for GPS are often
very simple and don’t require overflying a VOR or
NDB. Currently, many non-precision approaches have
“GPS overlays” to let you fly an existing procedure
(VOR, VOR/DME, NDB, RNAV, etc.) more accurately
using GPS. To date, there are over 2,400 GPS-only
approaches and over 2,900 GPS overlay approaches
worldwide.
Many overlay approaches are more complex (in
comparison to GPS-only approaches). The 500Wseries unit displays and guides you through each leg
of the approach — automatically sequencing through
each of these legs, up to the missed approach point
(MAP). Approaches may be flown “as published” with
the full transition — using any published feeder route
or initial approach fix (IAF) — or may be flown with a
vectors-to-final transition.
LNAV
Lateral Navigation approach. Fly to LNAV
minimums.
MAPR
Missed Approach indicates the system is
providing missed approach integrity and CDI
full-scale deflection ±0.3 NM.
ENR
En route, CDI full-scale deflection is 2.0 NM
or current CDI scale selection, whichever is
smaller.
TERM
Terminal, CDI full-scale deflection is 1.0 NM
or current CDI scale selection, whichever is
smaller.
DPRT
Departure, indicates the system is using nonprecision approach integrity. HAL = 0.3 and
CDI full-scale deflection is 0.3 NM.
OCN
Oceanic, CDI full-scale deflection is 2.0 NM.
LOW ALT
(lower window)
Flight mode annunciations are provided in the
lower left corner of the display indicating the current
mode of flight.
For LNAV+V, Lnav/Vnav, or LPV approaches,
the LOW ALT annunciation indicates the
aircraft’s estimated height is lower than the
Final Approach Waypoint height by more than
the current VPL plus 50 meters. This annunciation will not be active when TAWS or Terrain
is operational.
Approach operations on the 500W-series units
190-00357-00 Rev C
83
5 - PROCEDURES
Procedure Turn Approach
as appropriate. In some scenarios, you may find
it more convenient to immediately activate
the approach and skip the “Load” process
outlined above in step #3. The 500W-series
units provide both options.
typically begin with the same basic steps:
Approaches with Procedure Turns
The procedure turn portion of an approach is
stored as one of the legs of the approach. For this
reason, the 500W-series unit requires no special operations from the pilot — other than flying the procedure
turn itself — beyond what is required for any other
type of approach. Roll steering is provided to aircraft
with compatible autopilots.

Lynchburg (VA) Regional
VOR or GPS Rwy 04

DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
Basic Steps for Using Approaches
84
[RW04]
1.
Select the destination airport using the directto key, or as the last waypoint in the active
flight plan.
2.
Choose the “Select Approach?” option from
the Procedures Page or from the Active Flight
Plan Options.
3.
“Load” the approach (often while en route) in
anticipation of its future use. This places the
approach in the active flight plan, but retains
course guidance in the en route section until
the approach is “Activated”.
4.

“Activate” the full approach or vectors-to-final,
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
This example uses the VOR or GPS Runway 04
approach for Lynchburg (Virginia) Regional Airport,
KLYH, and assumes a departure from Frederick (Maryland) Municipal Airport, KFDK. The steps required to
set up and fly the approach are detailed below:
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
Procedure Turn Approach
1.
Prior to departing KFDK, the destination (KLYH)
is selected using the direct-to key or by creating a flight plan terminating at Lynchburg
Regional.
2.
While en route to KLYH, some 40-50 nautical miles away, you select the ATIS frequency
to monitor airport conditions and runway
usage. This is accomplished by displaying the
NAVCOM Page and selecting the ATIS frequency from the list. This places the frequency
on standby. Use the COM flip-flop key to
make the ATIS frequency active.
3.
From ATIS you learn that runway 04 is in use
and plan your approach accordingly. Press
the PROC key and select the “VOR 04-GPS”
approach. From the transitions window, select
LYH VOR (the IAF). Also, select “Load?” to load
(but not activate) the approach.
A second pop-up window displays available transitions. Highlight LYH VOR and press ENT. Finally, select “Load?” to add the
approach to the active flight plan.
4.
If you are cleared direct to the IAF, press the
PROC key, select “Activate Approach?” and
press ENT.
Flying the Procedure Turn
1.
Within 31 nautical miles of the destination airport, or when transitioning to the first waypoint
of an arrival procedure, the 500W-series unit
switches from “en route” mode to “terminal”
mode (as indicated in the lower left corner of
the screen). The switch to terminal mode is
accompanied by a gradual Course Deviation
Indicator (CDI) scale transition from 2.0 to 1.0
nautical miles, full scale deflection.
Press PROC, highlight “Select Approach?” and press ENT. From
the pop-up window, select the “VOR 04” approach into KLYH.
190-00357-00 Rev C
85
5 - PROCEDURES
Procedure Turn Approach


31 nm
RW04

As you approach the IAF, the “Left to 209° in x sec” waypoint
alert appears in the lower right corner. Prepare to turn to this
heading.




86
4.
DO NOT
USE FOR
NAVIGATION
5.
2.
Several miles prior to reaching the IAF (LYH),
you may wish to review the approach sequence.
Press the FPL key to display the Active Flight
Plan Page. Press the small right knob and turn
the large right knob to review each segment
of the approach. When finished, press FPL
again to return to the previous page.
3.
As you approach the IAF (LYH), a waypoint
alert (“Next DTK 205° in x sec”) appears in
the lower right corner of the screen. As the
distance (DIS) to the IAF approaches zero, the
alert is replaced by a turn advisory (“Left to
205° in x sec”). Dial the outbound course of
205° into the CDI (or HSI) using the OBS knob
and initiate a standard rate turn to this course
heading.
Fly the outbound course, keeping the CDI
needle centered.
Once you have flown approximately one minute
past the IAF (LYH), the alert message “Left to
160° in x sec” appears in the lower right corner
of the screen. You may initiate the procedure turn
at any time after receiving this alert message.
At approximately one minute past the IAF, an alert message
(“Left to 160° in x sec”) reminds you to begin the procedure
turn.
6.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Turn left to a heading of 160° to initiate the
procedure turn. Course guidance is provided
relative to the outbound leg from the FAF. (The
procedure turn is displayed on the Map Page
and indicated as the active leg on the Default
NAV and Active Flight Plan pages.) The CDI
needle starts moving to the right.
5 - PROCEDURES
Procedure Turn Approach
DO NOT
USE FOR
NAVIGATION
9.
RW04


When within 45° of the final approach course
and the FAF is the TO waypoint, the 500Wseries unit switches from terminal mode to
“approach” mode. CDI scaling is tightened
from 1.0 NM full scale deflection to either 0.3
nautical mile or 2° full scale deflection whichever is less at the FAF. The change occurs over
2 NM and is completed by the FAF.
10. As you approach the FAF, a waypoint alert in
the lower right corner (“Next DTK 026° in x
sec”) appears. Make any course adjustments
necessary for the final course segment (FAF to
MAP).

7.
After approximately one minute, make a 180°
right turn to a heading of 340° to intercept
the inbound course. The 500W-series unit
sequences to the inbound leg to the FAF, the
CDI needle swings to the opposite side to
provide proper sensing along the final course
segment and “Next DTK 025°” appears in the
lower right corner of the screen.
8.
As the CDI needle starts to center, make a right
turn to 025° — the final approach course.
11. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences
to the MAP (“RW04”, the runway threshold).
With the needle centered, fly toward the MAP,
observing the altitude minimums dictated by
the approach plate.
As you cross the FAF, the 500W-series unit automatically
sequences to the final course segment, which appears in
magenta on the Map Page.
Procedure turn, inbound. The CDI needle swings to the opposite side for proper sensing and “Next DTK 025° now” appears.
Turn to the new heading as the needle begins to center.
12. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint alert
(“Arriving at waypoint”) appears in the lower
right corner. CDI scaling continues to tighten
from 0.3 NM to 350 feet, full-scale deflection.
190-00357-00 Rev C
87
5 - PROCEDURES
Missed Approach
13. As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears
above the OBS key, indicating that automatic
sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A “from” indication is
displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page,
but course guidance along the final approach
course continues. If a missed approach is
required, use the OBS key to initiate the missed
approach sequence, as outlined on the following page.
Flying the Missed Approach
After you pass the MAP, if the runway isn’t in
sight you must execute a missed approach. The
500W-series unit continues to give guidance along an
extension of the final course segment (FAF to MAP)
until you manually initiate the missed approach
procedure (as mentioned previously in reference to the
“SUSP” advisory). The OBS key is used to initiate the
missed approach, as follows:
NOTE: Once you cross the FAF, the Map Page displays
the final course segment in magenta (the active leg
of the flight plan always appears in magenta) and a
dashed line extends the course beyond the missed
approach point (MAP). The dashed line is provided for
situational awareness only and should NOT be used
for navigation. Please, follow the published missed
approach procedures.
NOTE: It is the pilot’s responsibility for initial missed
approach guidance in accordance with published procedure. The unit may not provide correct guidance until
established on a defined leg.



RW04

DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
1.
As you cross the missed approach point, “SUSP” appears onscreen above the OBS key.
After commencing the published missed
approach procedure, and after the SUSP
annunciator has appeared, press the OBS key
to sequence to the first waypoint in the missed
approach procedure. This will simultaneously
result in several changes:
a. SUSP annunciation will extinguish.
b. The first waypoint in the missed approach
procedure will be sequenced.
c. The current approach annunciation (LPV,
L/NAV, LNAV+V or LNAV) will be replaced
with either MAPR or TERM, depending
88
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
Approach with Hold
on the design of the approach. Normally,
MAPR will be annunciated for missed
approach procedures in which the first leg
is a climb straight ahead to a waypoint,
whereas TERM will be annunciated for
missed approach procedures requiring a
turn.
d.
e.
The “FROM” indicator will change to a
“TO” indication.
An alert message in the lower right hand corner recommends
entry procedures for the holding pattern.
4.
If you press the OBS key a second time, the
missed approach holding point (MAHP; in this
case “SWARM” intersection) is automatically
offered as the destination waypoint.
2.
3.
CDI scaling will change to ±0.3 NM full
scale deflection if MAPR is annunciated,
or ±1.0 NM if TERM is annunciated.
The 500W-series unit provides course guidance only on the inbound side of the holding
pattern. Roll steering is provided to aircraft
with compatible autopilots. When leaving
the holding pattern to re-fly the approach
(or another approach) press the PROC key to
“Select Approach?” or “Activate Approach?”
as previously described. (Or, use the direct-to
key to select another destination.)
NOTE: In some cases, an additional hold waypoint
is added to the missed approach sequence. This additional waypoint is used as an aid in establishing
the holding pattern — especially where the MAP and
MAHP are the same waypoint.
An alert message in the lower right hand corner
of the screen recommends entry procedures for
the holding pattern. As you fly the holding pattern, the timer in the lower right corner of the
Default NAV Page automatically resets on the
outbound side of the hold when you are abeam
the hold waypoint. The timer again resets as
you turn inbound (within approximately 30°
of the inbound course). This allows you to use
standard timing (typically one minute) to fly
the inbound and outbound legs of the hold.
190-00357-00 Rev C
89
5 - PROCEDURES
Approach with Hold
Flying an Approach with a Hold
5.
Starting where the previous example left off,
we’ll assume weather conditions resulted in a missed
approach at Lynchburg Regional. Now, you’ve decided
to divert to Farmville Regional (KFVX) instead.
From the transitions window, select BODRY
intersection as the IAF, assuming that ATC has
cleared you direct to the BODRY intersection.
Also, select “Activate?” to load and activate
the approach.


Farmville (VA) Regional
GPS Rwy 21
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
1.
Press direct-to.
2.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the destination airport’s identifier (KFVX).
3.
Press ENT twice.
Press PROC and select the “GPS 21” approach. Then, select BODRY intersection (the
IAF) from the transitions window.
6.
This time, you select the GPS runway 21 approach
into Farmville Regional. The GPS runway 21 approach
begins with a holding pattern at the IAF, BODRY
intersection.
4. Press PROC and select the “GPS 21”
approach.
90
190-00357-00 Rev C
Once you activate the approach, the Active
Flight Plan Page appears. You may review the
approach sequence by pressing the small right
knob and turning the large right knob. Press
FPL to return to the navigation pages.
Once you “Activate?” the approach, the
Active Flight Plan Page appears showing the
sequence of waypoints in the approach.
5 - PROCEDURES
Approach with Hold
7.
As in the last example, within 31 nautical miles
of the airport, the 500W-series unit switches
from en route mode to terminal mode, and the
CDI scale transitions from 2.0 to 1.0 nautical
miles, full scale deflection.
8.
NOTE: Upon activating an RNAV GPS approach,
you are given the option to skip any non-required
holding patterns during the initial transitions of
the approach. In a GPS approach, you will not be
given the option and you must manually reselect
waypoint sequencing.
Just prior to crossing BODRY intersection, an
alert — ”Hold teardrop” — appears in the
lower right corner of the screen to suggest the
proper holding pattern entry. (“Hold direct” or
“Hold parallel” may be offered on other similar
approaches.)


(IAF)
(FAF)
31nm (from airport)
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
9.
As mentioned in the missed approach example,
the Default NAV Page displays a timer or
distance during the holding pattern. Use this
timer to fly the one minute outbound portion
of the holding pattern. (The holding pattern is
displayed on the Map Page and indicated as
the active leg on the Default NAV and Active
Flight Plan pages.)
Prior to crossing the BODRY intersection, an alert “Hold teardrop” is shown to suggest the proper holding
pattern.
While flying the holding pattern, a timer appears on the Default NAV Page. Use the timer to fly the one minute outbound
portion of the pattern.
190-00357-00 Rev C
91
5 - PROCEDURES
Approach with Hold
NOTE: If you need to lose extra altitude or speed
by going around the holding pattern again, press
OBS to manually suspend waypoint sequencing
BEFORE crossing the holding waypoint the second time. If you’ve already passed this waypoint,
re-activate the holding pattern using the shortcut
steps described in Section 4 - “To activate a
specific leg of the active flight plan”.
13. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences
to the MAP (“RW21”, the runway threshold).
With the needle centered, fly toward the MAP,
observing the altitude minimums dictated by
the approach plate.
10. As you approach BODRY intersection from
within the holding pattern, a waypoint alert
(”Next DTK 209°”) appears in the lower right
corner of the screen.
11. When within 45° of the final approach course
and the FAF is the TO waypoint, the 500Wseries unit switches from terminal mode to
approach mode. CDI scaling is tightened from
1.0 NM full scale deflection to either 0.3 NM
or 2° full scale deflection whichever is less at
the FAF. The change occurs over 2 NM and is
completed by the FAF.
12. As you approach the FAF, a waypoint alert in
the lower right corner (“Next DTK 210° in x
sec”) appears. Make any course adjustments
necessary for the final course segment (FAF to
MAP).
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
As you approach the FAF, the “Next DTK 210°
in x sec” waypoint alert appears in the lower
right corner of the screen.
92
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: When viewing the Map Page, you’ll note
that the final course segment is displayed in magenta — the active leg of the flight plan always
appears in magenta — and a dashed line extends
the course beyond the MAP. Do NOT follow
this extended course. Instead, follow published
missed approach procedures.
5 - PROCEDURES
DME Arc Approach
14. As you near the MAP, a waypoint alert (“Arriving at waypoint”) appears in the lower right
corner. CDI scaling continues to tighten from
0.3 NM to 350 feet, full-scale deflection.
Flying a DME Arc Approach
The GPS overlay for a DME arc approach uses
additional Jeppesen-provided waypoints to define the
arc. These waypoints are indicated by “D” as the first
letter in the waypoint name. This is followed by three
numbers indicating the radial the waypoint lies on. The
last letter indicates the radius of the arc.
Billard Muni (Topeka, KS)
VOR Rwy 22
As you approach the MAP, the “Arriving at
waypoint” waypoint alert appears in the
lower right corner of the screen.

15. As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears
above the OBS key, indicating that automatic
sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A “from” indication is
displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page,
but course guidance along the final approach
course continues. If a missed approach is
required, use the OBS key to initiate the missed
approach sequence.
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
NOTE: As this manual was being written, the letter/number DME arc names were being replaced
with standard five-letter intersection names. You
may encounter either naming convention for an
approach you select.
When cleared for a DME arc approach, you may do
one of the following to intercept the arc:
• Follow a specified radial inbound to intercept the
IAF.
• Fly directly to the IAF at the beginning of the
arc.
• Follow ATC vectors which allow you to intercept
the arc at any point along the arc.
This example is based upon a flight from Hutchinson (Kansas) Municipal (KHUT) to Billard Municipal
(KTOP) in Topeka, Kansas. The VOR/DME runway 22
190-00357-00 Rev C
93
5 - PROCEDURES
DME Arc Approach
approach is selected, along with “D258G/LEBVY” as
the IAF.
1. Select Billard Muni (KTOP) as your destination,
via the direct-to key or as the last waypoint
in a flight plan.
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION







31 nm (from airport)
Press direct-to and select “KTOP” as your
destination (using the small and large
right knobs).
2.
Press the PROC key and select the “VOR 22”
approach. From the transitions window, select
“LEBVY” as the IAF. Then, select “Load?” (or
“Activate?”, if already cleared direct to the IAF
for the approach).
Press PROC and select the “VOR 22” approach and “LEBVY” transition (using the
large right knob and ENT).
94
Billard Muni (Topeka, KS)
VOR Rwy 22
3.
Within 31 nautical miles of KTOP, the 500Wseries unit switches from en route mode to
terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions
from 2.0 to 1.0 nautical miles, full scale deflection.
4.
If you haven’t already activated the approach
(in step #2), be sure to do so when cleared for
the approach.
If you’ve loaded the approach, but not activated it, press PROC
and select “Activate Approach?”.
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
DME Arc Approach
NOTE: Since this is not a GPS approach, the pilot
should be using the VLOC receiver, tuned to the correct
VOR (TOP) for navigation. However, as an example,
operation is essentially identical.
5.
As you approach the IAF (D258G/LEBVY), a
waypoint alert (“Left to 353° in x sec”) appears
in the lower right corner of the screen. As the
distance (DIS) to the IAF approaches zero, the
alert is replaced by a turn advisory (“Turn to
353° now”).
6.
Follow the arc, keeping the CDI needle centered. When using an autopilot, the course
select on the CDI (or HSI) must be periodically
updated with the desired track (DTK) to ensure
proper tracking through the arc. Whenever the
course select setting and desired track differ by
more than 10°, a “Set course to ###°” message appears on the Message Page.
7.
The next point in the approach is an intermediate fix, labeled “D025G/DMARY”. As you
approach this intermediate fix, a waypoint alert
(“Right to 205° in x sec”) appears in the lower
right corner of the screen. As the distance to
this fix approaches zero, the alert is replaced
by a turn advisory (“Right to 205° now”). Dial
this course into the CDI (or HSI) using the OBS
knob and initiate a standard rate turn to this
course heading.
8.
When within 45° of the final approach course
and the FAF is the TO waypoint, the 500Wseries unit switches from terminal mode to
approach mode. CDI scaling is tightened from
1.0 to 0.3 nautical mile, full scale deflection. At
2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened
from 1.0 to the angular full scale deflection
(typically the angular full-scale deflection is
2.0°, but will be as defined for the approach.
9.
As you approach the FAF, a waypoint alert in
the lower right corner (“Right to 214° in x
sec”) appears. Select this course on the CDI
(or HSI) using the OBS knob and turn to the
final course segment (FAF to MAP) heading.
As you fly the DME arc, “Set Course to ###°”
alerts you to periodically adjust the course
select on the external CDI (or HSI).
As you approach the FAF, a “Right to 214° in
x sec” waypoint alert appears in the lower
right corner of the screen.
190-00357-00 Rev C
95
5 - PROCEDURES
Vectors-To-Final Approach
11. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint alert
(“Arriving at waypoint”) appears in the lower
right corner of the screen. CDI scaling continues
to tighten from 0.3 NM to 350 feet, full-scale
deflection.
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION

As you approach the MAP, an
“Arriving at waypoint” alert appears in the
lower right corner of the screen.
10. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences
to the MAP (“RW22”, the runway threshold).
With the needle centered, fly toward the MAP,
observing the altitude minimums dictated by
the approach plate. When viewing the Map
Page, you’ll note that the final course segment
is displayed in magenta (the active leg of the
flight plan always appears in magenta) and
a dashed line extends the course beyond the
MAP.
96
12.
190-00357-00 Rev C
As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears
above the OBS key, indicating that automatic
sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A “from” indication is
displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page,
but course guidance along the final approach
course continues. Do NOT follow this extended
course. Follow published missed approach
procedures using the OBS key to initiate the
missed approach sequence.
5 - PROCEDURES
Vectors-To-Final Approach
Vectors to Final
4.
Let’s take a second look at the “VOR 22” approach
into Billard Municipal. Instead of following the DME
arc, ATC tells you to expect vectors onto the final
approach course. There are several ways to select “vectors to final” with the 500W-series unit. The first two
options below normally require the least workload to
accomplish:
• When the approach is first selected, choose “VECTORS” from the transitions (“TRANS”) window.
• Load a full approach — including the IAF from the
transitions window. When cleared, press PROC
and select “Activate Vectors-To-Final?”.
Select “Load?” (or “Activate?”, if already on
vectors-to-final).
To activate vectors-to-final from the procedures
page:
1.
Select Billard Muni (KTOP) as your destination,
using the direct-to key or as the last waypoint
in a flight plan.
2.
Press the PROC key and select the “VOR 22”
approach.
3.
From the transitions window, select “D258G/
LEBVY” as the IAF. Also, select “Load?”.
• Load the full approach. Use the direct-to key (by
pressing it twice) from the Active Flight Plan Page
to select the desired leg of the approach.
NOTE: Since this is not a GPS approach, the pilot
should be using the VLOC receiver, tuned to the correct
VOR (TOP) for navigation.
To select “VECTORS” from the transitions window:
1.
Select Billard Muni (KTOP) as your destination,
using the direct-to key, or as the last waypoint
in a flight plan.
2.
Press the PROC key and select the “VOR 22”
approach.
3.
From the transitions window, select “VECTORS”.
4.
When cleared, press the PROC key and select
“Activate Vectors-To-Final?”.
Press PROC and select “Activate VectorsTo-Final?” to activate only the final course
segment of a loaded approach.
Select “VECTORS” from the transitions
window to activate only the final approach
course.
190-00357-00 Rev C
97
5 - PROCEDURES
Vectors-To-Final Approach
Flying the Vectors Approach
2.
With “Vectors-To-Final” (VTF) selected, the CDI
needle remains off center until you’re established on
the final approach course. With the approach activated, the Map Page displays an extension of the final
approach course in magenta (remember, magenta is
used to depict the active leg of the flight plan) and
“VTF” appears as part of the active leg on the Default
NAV Page (as a reminder that the approach was
activated with vectors-to-final). In this example, we’ll
assume ATC vectors result in a rectangular course to
intercept final, as follows:
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
If the approach is loaded, but not yet
activated, press PROC and select “Activate
Vectors-To-Final?”.


3.
ATC instructs you to turn left to a heading
of 025°. This places you parallel to the final
approach course in the opposite direction. CDI
needle deflection is to the left.
4.
ATC instructs you to turn right to a heading of
115°.
5.
ATC instructs you to turn right to a heading of
175° to intercept the final approach course.
As you converge with the final approach
course the needle moves toward the center.
(In the following illustration, the needle has
returned to the on-screen CDI and your current
position is less than 0.5 NM right of the final
approach course.) Once the aircraft is within
the approach course and the CDI is active,
automatic waypoint sequencing resumes and
SUSP is removed.


1.
98
The unit suspends automatic waypoint
sequencing in this case, because VTF was
activated while on the “From” side of the Final
Approach Fix.
When VTF is activated, the 500W-series unit
switches to approach mode and course guidance is given along the final approach course.
CDI full-scale deflection is as shown in Appendix C.
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
Course-From-Fix Legs
As you converge with the final approach course, the CDI
needle (on the Default NAV Page and the external CDI) moves
toward the center.
6.
As the CDI needle centers, make any remaining
course corrections to establish yourself on the
final approach course.


8.
As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences
to the MAP (“RW22”). With the needle centered, fly toward the MAP, observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate.
On-screen CDI scaling continues to tighten to
350 feet, full-scale deflection.
9.
As you approach the MAP, a waypoint alert
(“Arriving at waypoint”) appears in the lower
right corner.
10. As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears
above the OBS key, indicating that automatic
sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A “from” indication is
displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page,
but course guidance along the final approach
course continues. Do NOT follow this extended
course. Follow published missed approach
procedures using the OBS key to initiate the
missed approach sequence.



7.
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
As you approach the FAF, a waypoint alert in
the lower right corner (“Next DTK 214° in xx
sec”) appears. Make any course adjustments
necessary for the final course segment (FAF to
MAP). After the FAF, VLOC guidance should be
used for this approach. LNAV remains annunciated to indicate on-screen CDI sensitivity.
190-00357-00 Rev C
As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears above
the OBS key, indicating that the automatic
waypoint sequencing is suspended.
99
5 - PROCEDURES
Course-From-Fix Legs
Course From Fix Flight Plan Legs
Certain approach, departure, and arrival procedures
in the Jeppesen database contain Course From Fix flight
plan legs. The 500W-series unit is able to load these
legs into the flight plan along with the rest of the procedure data, and to provide navigation along these legs.
Palmdale (CA) AF Plant 42
VOR/DME or GPS Rwy 25





As the distance to the IAF approaches zero,
the waypoint alert is replaced by a turn
advisory (“Right to 072° in x sec”). Initiate a
standard rate turn to this course heading.


DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION
2.
Fly the outbound course, keeping the CDI
needle centered. You are now on the “course
from fix to distance” leg, as shown on the
Active Flight Plan and Default NAV Pages.
Note the magenta line in the bottom figure,
which represents the currently active leg of
the approach. The distance (DIS) displayed on
the above screens is TO the “D13.0” point. The
flight plan automatically sequences to the next
leg upon reaching “D13.0”.
3.
At 13.0 NM from the IAF, a waypoint alert
(“Next DTK 265° in x sec”) appears in the
lower right corner of the screen. Make a standard rate turn to the right to intercept the final
approach course and watch for the CDI needle
to begin to center.
There are three different types of course from fix legs:
TYPE 1: Course from fix to distance, or Course
from fix to DME distance
Course from fix to distance legs appears in the flight
plan like normal waypoints, but the destination name
always begins with a "D", followed by a distance in
tenths of nautical miles from the waypoint fix. This
example uses the VOR/DME RWY 25 approach into
Palmdale, California (KPMD) and includes a teardrop
course reversal.
1.
100
As you reach the initial approach fix (PMD),
a waypoint alert (“Right to 072° in x sec”)
appears in the lower right corner of the screen.
As the distance to the IAF approaches zero, the
alert is replaced by a turn advisory (“Right to
072° now”). Dial the outbound course into the
CDI (or HSI) using the OBS knob and initiate a
standard rate turn to this course heading.
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
Course-From-Fix Legs
9.
to tighten from 0.3 NM to 350 feet, full-scale
deflection.
As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears
above the OBS key, indicating that automatic
sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. If a missed approach is
required, use the OBS key to initiate the missed
approach sequence, as outlined below.
At 13.0 nautical miles from the IAF, a
waypoint alert appears (“Next DTK 265° in x
sec”). Make a standard rate turn to intercept
the approach course.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
As you approach the intermediate fix (CF25),
a waypoint alert (“Next DTK 265° in x sec”)
appears. Make any necessary course adjustments.
When within 45° of the final approach course
(past CF25), the 500W-series unit switches
from terminal mode to approach mode.
(“LNAV” appears in the lower left corner of
the screen — replacing “TERM”.) CDI scaling
will be tightened from 1.0 to 0.3 nautical mile
full scale deflection, or 2° full scale deflection,
whichever is less at the FAF, and as defined for
the approach. The change occurs over 2 NM
and is completed by the FAF.
As you approach the FAF, “Next DTK 265° in
x sec” appears in the lower right corner of the
screen.
As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences
to the MAP (MA25). With the CDI needle
centered, fly toward the MAP, observing the
altitude minimums dictated by the approach
plate.
As you approach the MAP, a waypoint alert
(“Arriving at waypoint”) appears in the lower
right corner of the screen. CDI scaling continues
As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears above the OBS key,
indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints
is suspended at the MAP. Press OBS to initiate a missed approach.
TYPE 2: Course from fix to altitude
Course from fix to altitude legs shows the specific
target altitude on the Active Flight Plan and Default
NAV Pages. The missed approach sequence for the
Palmdale VOR/DME RWY 25 approach includes a
course from fix to altitude leg. In this instance, the
leg corresponds to the initial phase of the missed
approach, which reads “Climb to 5000’ outbound via
PMD VOR R-282”.
190-00357-00 Rev C
101
5 - PROCEDURES
Course-From-Fix Legs
MISSED APPROACH:
Palmdale (CA) USAF Plant 42
VOR/DME or GPS Rwy 25





DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION
Within a few seconds of pressing OBS to
start the missed approach, “SUSP” re-appears above the OBS key.
MISSED APPROACH
Climb to 5000’ outbound
via PMD
VOR R-282, then climbing
RIGHT
turn to 7000’ direct PMD
VOR and
hold.
1.
2.
3.
After crossing the MAP, press the OBS key. The
missed approach sequence is automatically
offered, starting with the “course from fix to
altitude” leg. The “Next DTK 282° in x sec”
waypoint alert appears in the lower right corner
of the screen. Follow the missed approach procedures, as published on your approach plate,
for proper climb and heading instructions.
Note that within a few seconds of pressing
OBS to release suspend mode and start the
missed approach sequence, “SUSP” re-appears
above the OBS key as the 500W-series unit
returns to suspend mode. This is normal when
flying a “course from fix to altitude” leg and
indicates that automatic leg sequencing is
suspended.
4.
Fly the outbound course keeping the CDI needle
centered. The Map Page depicts the flight path
extending indefinitely from PMD VOR.
Upon reaching the desired altitude (5000’),
press the OBS key to return to automatic leg
sequencing. Confirm that “SUSP” no longer
appears directly above the OBS key.
Upon reaching the desired altitude, press OBS to return to
automatic leg sequencing. An alert message (“Next DTK 133°
in x sec”) appears guiding you to the inbound course.
5.
102
NOTE: If there is a valid baro-corrected pressure altitude
input, the SUSP is not annunciated and the leg sequences
automatically when the altitude (5,000 ft) is reached.
190-00357-00 Rev C
An alert (“Next DTK 133° in x sec”) appears
guiding you to the inbound course. The actual
desired track (DTK) depends on your ground
5 - PROCEDURES
Course-From-Fix Legs
speed and distance from PMD VOR. Intercept
and fly the inbound course, keeping the CDI
needle centered.
6.
As you approach PMD VOR (the missed
approach holding point), an alert message
in the lower right-hand corner of the screen
recommends the holding pattern entry procedure (“Hold parallel”). As you fly the holding
pattern, a timer appears on the Default NAV
Page. The timer automatically resets on each
outbound and inbound portion of the holding
pattern.
TYPE 3: Course from fix to manual sequence
Course from fix to manual sequence legs appears on
the Active Flight Plan and Map Pages with “man seq” in
place of a waypoint identifier. An example of this type
of course leg appears in the COASTAL TWO DEPARTURE from Westfield, Massachusetts (Barnes Muni).
The example leg corresponds to the departure leg from
Barnes Municipal and appears as follows on the Active
Flight Plan and Default NAV Pages:
COASTAL TWO DEPARTURE
(CSTL2.CCC)
DEPARTING BARNES MUNI,
Fly assigned heading and altitude for
radar vectors to
HFD VOR. Expect
clearance to
requested flight level 10 minutes
after departure. From over
HFD VOR, proceed via the
HFD R-143 to Thumb Int, then via the
HTO R-010 to
Yoder Int, then via
the CCC R-057 to
CCC VOR. Then via
transition or assigned route.
An alert message recommends the holding pattern entry procedure (e.g., “Hold
parallel”).
7.
8.
Note that the 500W-series unit again displays “SUSP” above the OBS key. Automatic
waypoint sequencing is suspended at the
missed approach holding point. A waypoint
alert (“Arriving at waypoint”) appears in the
lower right corner of the screen each time you
approach PMD VOR in the holding pattern.
When leaving the holding pattern, press the
PROC key to reactivate the approach or select
a different approach, or press direct-to to
select another destination.
DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION
1.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Select the departure (CSTL2) from the Procedures Page. Then select the departure
runway (RW02, in this example) and transition
(GEDIC).
103
5 - PROCEDURES
ILS Approach
2.
GNS 530W only
As you depart the airfield, “Next DTK 026° in
x sec” appears in the lower right corner of the
screen and “SUSP” appears directly above the
OBS key. You are now on the “course from fix
to manual sequence” leg. The distance displayed on the Active Flight Plan, Default NAV
and Map pages is FROM the waypoint fix (the
departure runway, in this example).
Once cleared to the next leg, press OBS. An
alert appears indicating the desired track and
the unit sequences to the next waypoint.
ILS Approaches
As you depart the airfield, “Next DTK 026° in x sec” appears in
the lower right corner and “SUSP” appears above the OBS key.
Indicated distance increases and is FROM the waypoint fix.
3.
Fly the outbound course keeping the CDI needle
centered. Once you are cleared to sequence to
the next leg, press the OBS key. Confirm that
“SUSP” no longer appears directly above the
OBS key. An alert (“Next DTK 185° in x sec”)
appears in the lower right corner of the screen
to guide you to the next waypoint (HFD VOR).
The actual desired track (DTK) depends on your
ground speed and distance from HFD VOR.
4.
Once the OBS key is pressed, the 500W-series
unit automatically sequences to each waypoint
along the remainder of the departure route,
including the selected transition.
Precision ILS approaches can be performed with
the GNS 530W’s built-in VLOC (VOR/localizer/
glideslope) receivers. The GPS receiver can be used for
guidance prior to reaching the final approach fix, but
once there, the proper frequency must be selected on
the VLOC window (left side of screen) and the CDI
output set to “VLOC”.
The GNS 530W can use its internal GPS
receiver to guide you on the initial portion
of an ILS approach. At this stage “GPS” is
indicated above the CDI key.
104
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: GPS level of service annunciations (LPV, ENR,
etc. as shown on page 83) are not applicable to the
external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
GNS 530W only
1.2NM
1.2NM
15NM
GPS
OC
VL
to rea
a
h
itc his
Sw n t
o
i
t
Au with
5 - PROCEDURES
ILS Approach
NOTE: If you attempt to intercept the approach course
at a distance less than 2.0 nautical miles from the FAF,
the GNS 530W does not automatically switch the CDI
to VLOC. In this case, press the CDI key to manually
switch from GPS to VLOC.
VLOC
The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC is not
immediate, but instead occurs gradually to prevent
abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot. The
CDI selection can also be changed manually by pressing the CDI key. Once the switch from GPS to VLOC
has occured, either automatically or manually, it does
not automatically switch again until the approach is
reactivated or another approach is selected. To prevent
automatic ILS CDI selection, choose the “Manual” ILS
CDI setting (the factory default setting is “Auto”, which
enables the automatic switch to VLOC) - see AUX
- Setup 1.
GPS
VLOC
2NM
MANUAL
FAF
The GNS 530W can be set to automatically switch
the external CDI output from GPS to VLOC as you
intercept the final approach course (if used with a
KAP140/KFC225 autopilot, you will need to manually
enable outputs). When the ILS approach is activated
(and the correct ILS frequency is active in the VLOC
window), the GNS 530W automatically switches
within 1.2 nautical miles left or right of the final
approach course. This switch can take place anywhere
from 2.0 to 15.0 nautical miles from the FAF.
The illustration above shows both multiple locations along the approach path and the CDI selection
that you can expect: GPS or VLOC. Within the area
of the shaded box, the automatic switch from GPS to
VLOC should occur.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Within the shaded area of the previous runway illustration, the GNS 530W automatically
switches the external CDI to the GNS 530W’s
internal VLOC receiver. “VLOC” appears
above the CDI key.
105
5 - PROCEDURES
ILS Approach
GNS 530W only
Selecting an ILS Approach
For this example, we’ll use a flight from Laughlin
Bullhead (Arizona) International (KIFP) to Flagstaff Pulliam (KFLG) and select the ILS runway 21
approach. “SHUTR” intersection is selected as the IAF,
which includes an outbound leg and a procedure turn.
Of course, vectors-to-final could also be selected, as
previously described for the non-precision approach
examples.
Once the destination airport is selected (using direct-to or an active flight plan), press
PROC and choose the “Select Approach”
option.
Flagstaff (AZ) Pulliam
ILS DME Rwy 21
3.

From the transitions window, select “SHUTR”
as the IAF. Also, select “Load?” (or “Activate?”,
if already cleared for the approach).

DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
1.
Select Flagstaff Pulliam (KFLG) as your destination, via the direct-to key or as the last
waypoint in a flight plan.
2.
Press the PROC key and select the “ILS 21”
approach.
Once the approach is selected (by name), a
pop-up window asks you to select the appropriate transition (“SHUTR” intersection, in
this example).
4.
A reminder message appears, indicating that
GPS can only be used for approach monitoring.
As mentioned previously, you need to use the
VLOC receiver for this approach. Press ENT to
acknowledge the message.
When you “Load?” (or “Activate?”) an ILS
approach, the ILS frequency is automatically placed in the
standby field of the VLOC window. To use this frequency,
106
190-00357-00 Rev C
GNS 530W only
to do so when cleared for the approach. See
“Approaches with Procedure Turns” in this
section, step #4 for a description of this operation.
simply press the VLOC flip-flop key to place it in the
active frequency field.
Flying the ILS Approach
When you “Activate?” an ILS approach, automatic
switching of the external CDI is enabled (unless
turned off from the CDI/Alarms Page). When you are
established on the inbound course to the FAF (and
within 45°), the external CDI guidance automatically
switches from “GPS” (shown in green text) to “VLOC”
(shown in white text). If you have forgotten to activate
the ILS frequency (step #4 below), automatic selection of
“VLOC” does not occur.



5 - PROCEDURES
ILS Approach
3.


As you approach the IAF (SHUTR), a waypoint
alert (“Left to 032° in x sec”) appears in the
lower right corner of the screen.
As you approach the IAF, “Left to 032° in
x sec” appears, followed by “Left to 032°
now” when it’s time to begin the turn to the
outbound course.
4.
If you haven’t already done so, press the VLOC
flip-flop key to activate the ILS frequency.
If you forget this step, the unit displays a
reminder message (within 2 NM of the FAF)
to activate the ILS frequency.
5.
As the distance (DIS) to the IAF approaches
zero, the alert is replaced by a turn advisory
(“Left to 032° now”).
6.
Fly the outbound course (030°), keeping the
needle centered on the external CDI (or HSI).
7.
Once you have flown approximately one minute
past SHUTR intersection, the alert message
“Right to 075° in x sec” appears in the lower
right corner of the screen (if you haven’t
already begun the procedure turn).
31nm (from airport)
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
1.
Within 31 nautical miles of KFLG, the unit
switches from en route mode to terminal mode
and the CDI scale transitions from 2.0 to 1.0
nautical miles, full scale deflection.
2.
If you haven’t already activated the approach
(in the steps on the previous page), be sure
190-00357-00 Rev C
107
5 - PROCEDURES
ILS Approach
GNS 530W only
9.
“Right to 075° in 7 sec” appears in the lower
right corner of the screen to remind you to
initiate the procedure turn.
8.
Turn right to a heading of 075° to initiate the
procedure turn. Messages displayed during
turn provide roll steering guidance. (The procedure turn is displayed on the Map Page and
indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV
and Active Flight Plan pages.) The external CDI
needle starts moving to the left.


After approximately one minute, a message
will appear for turn advisory (“Left to 255°
in x sec”) to intercept the ILS. The GNS 530W
sequences to the inbound leg and “Left to 210°
now” appears in the lower right corner of the
screen. CDI coupling automatically switches
from the “GPS” receiver to the “VLOC” receiver
as you complete the inbound turn. (If the ILS
frequency has not been activated, per step #4,
this automatic CDI switch does not occur.)
NOTE: From this point on, primary navigation is
provided by the VLOC receiver. You may continue
to use the GPS receiver for supplemental navigation guidance only. If automatic CDI switching
is disabled (“Manual” selected), the reminder
message “Select VLOC on CDI for approach” appears at 3.0 nautical miles prior to the FAF. In this
instance, you must press CDI to manually switch
CDI output to the VLOC receiver and continue the
approach.

The GNS 530W automatically switches from
the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver as you
complete the turn inbound. The annunciator
above the CDI key switches from “GPS” to
“VLOC”.
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
108
10. As the CDI needle starts to center, make a
left turn to 210° to track the ILS approach
course.
190-00357-00 Rev C
GNS 530W only
11. As you approach the FAF (SHUTR), “LNAV”
appears in the lower left corner of the screen
— indicating a CDI scale transition from 1.0
to 0.3 nautical miles, full scale deflection. This
scale transition applies only to the Default NAV
Page’s on-screen CDI, since the external CDI or
HSI is now coupled to the VLOC receiver. GPS
CDI full-scale deflection is 2° angular, even past
the FAF.
As you approach the FAF, a waypoint alert
appears indicating that “Next DTK 210° in
x sec. .
5 - PROCEDURES
ILS Approach
DO NOT USE FOR
NAVIGATION
14. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint alert
(“Arriving at waypoint”) appears in the lower
right corner.
12. Also as you approach SHUTR, a waypoint alert
(“Next DTK 210° in x sec”) appears in the
lower right corner of the screen.
13. As you cross SHUTR, the destination sequences
to the MAP (“RW21”, the runway threshold).
With the needle on the external CDI (or HSI)
centered, fly toward the MAP, observing the
altitude minimums dictated by the approach
plate.
NOTE: When viewing the Map Page, you’ll note
that the final course segment is displayed in
magenta (the active leg of the flight plan always
appears in magenta) and a dashed line extends
the course beyond the MAP.
As you approach the MAP, “Arriving at waypoint” appears in
the lower right corner of the screen.
15. As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears
above the OBS key, indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is
suspended at the MAP. A “FROM” indication
190-00357-00 Rev C
109
5 - PROCEDURES
LPV Approach
is displayed on the Default NAV Page, but
course guidance along the final approach
course continues. Do NOT follow this extended
course. Follow published missed approach
procedures using the OBS key to initiate the
missed approach sequence.
Selecting an LPV Approach
For this example, we’ll use a flight from Eugene
Oregon (KEUG) to Salem, Oregon (KSLE) and select
the RNAV runway 31 approach. “GLORR” intersection
is selected as the IAF. Of course, vectors-to-final could
also be selected, as previously described for the nonprecision approach examples.
1.
With Salem (KSLE) as your destination in your
flight plan, press the PROC key and select
the “RNAV 31 Z (GPS)” approach and press
ENT.
2.
From the transitions field, select “GLORR” as
the IAF and press ENT.
3.
Select “Load?” and press ENT to add the
approach to the active flight plan. Review and
execute the modified flight plan.
4.
Go direct to GLORR when cleared “Direct
GLORR” for the approach.
As you cross the MAP, “SUSP” appears above
the OBS key. To execute the missed approach,
press OBS and follow the published missed
approach procedures.
110
NOTE: In addition to using the OBS key to initiate
the missed approach sequence, you may wish to
press the CDI key to manually switch external CDI
output to the GPS receiver. “GPS” is indicated
above the CDI key. If you leave the external CDI
output on “VLOC” and are using an external CDI
(not an HSI), expect reverse sensing on the back
course of the ILS.
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
LPV Approach
Flying the LPV Approach
1.
Within 31 nautical miles of KSLE, the GNS
500W Series unit switches from en route mode
to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions
from 2.0 to 1.0 nautical miles, full scale deflection.
2.
As you approach the IAF (GLORR), a waypoint
message (“Left to 314° in x sec”) appears on
the bottom of the screen.
3.
As the distance (DIS) to the IAF approaches
zero, the message is replaced by a turn advisory that counts down 10 seconds prior to the
turn.
4.
As you approach the FAF (LOTKE), the GNS
500W-series unit will gradually transition to an
angular CDI scale. This allows the approach to
be flown in an identical fashion to a standard
Localizer or ILS approach. At 2.0 NM from
the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened from 1.0 to
the angular full scale deflection (typically the
angular full-scale deflection is 2.0°, but will be
as defined for the approach).
5.
Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF (LOTKE),
the unit will check the required Horizontal Alarm
Limit (HAL) and Vertical Alarm Limit (VAL) to
ensure the GPS position integrity is within limits
to complete the LPV precision approach. In the
event the HAL or VAL limits are exceeded, the
approach will be downgraded to a non-precision approach indicated by “Lnav” on the
moving map, a message that the approach is
downgraded (“Approach downgraded - Use
LNAV minima”), and the glideslope indicator
will be flagged. You may continue the approach
using LNAV non-precision minimums if there
are LNAV minimums for this approach. In the
rare event the GPS integrity cannot meet the
non-precision HAL limits, the unit will send a
message to the pilot to abort the approach
(“Abort Approach - Loss of Navigation”). The
unit will revert to terminal limits to support
navigation to the missed approach when the
message is acknowledged.
6.
Capture the glideslope as you would an ILS
glideslope.
7.
As you cross LOTKE, the destination sequences
to CUKEV and then the MAP (“RW31”, the
runway threshold). With the needle on the
external CDI (or HSI) centered, fly toward the
MAP, observing the altitude minimums dictated
by the approach plate.
As you approach the FAF (LOTKE), a waypoint
alert (“Next DTK 313° in x sec”) appears in the
lower right corner of the display reminding
you to begin the turn.
190-00357-00 Rev C
111
5 - PROCEDURES
LNAV Approach
be suspended. Prepare the aircraft for missed
approach operation. Press the OBS key to
sequence to the Missed Approach procedure.
After you cross the FAF (LOTKE), follow the
guidance provided to the MAP (RW31).
8.
When viewing the Map Page, you’ll note
that the final course segment is displayed in
magenta (the active leg of the flight plan always
appears in magenta).
After you cross the MAP and go to the MAHP,
follow the guidance provided.
9. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint message
(“Next DTK 312° in x sec”) appears on the
11. Fly the guidance provided by the unit to the
bottom of the screen.
ARTTY intersection and hold.
10. Once the unit crosses the MAP (defined as
the runway end waypoint), sequencing will
RNAV Approach Procedures
The GNS 500W Series allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV + V and LPV approaches according to the
published chart.
HSI
Annunciation
L/VNAV
LNAV
LNAV + V
LPV
112
Description
Minimums
Lateral Navigation/Vertical Navigation. RNAV non-precision approach with advisory
vertical guidance.
Lateral Navigation. RNAV non-precision approach.
Published LNAV/VNAV
minimums.
Published LNAV minimums.
Lateral Navigation with Advisory Vertical Guidance. RNAV non-precision LNAV
approach with advisory vertical guidance. The glidepath is typically denoted by
a light dashed line on the vertical profile (Jeppeson only) with an associated
glidepath angle (usually in the 3.00 degree range) and is provided to assist the
pilot in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath, similar to an ILS glideslope.
Lateral Precision with Vertical guidance (LPV) approach.
RNAV precision approach.
Published LNAV minimums.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Published LPV minimums.
5 - PROCEDURES
Additional Approach Info
NOTE: Minimums will be controlling, do not descend
below applicable minimum descent altitude or decision
height until criteria of FAR 91.175 are met.
Points to Remember for ALL Approaches
• The GNS 500W-series unit is designed to complement your printed approach plates and vastly
improve situational awareness throughout the
approach. However, you must always fly an approach
as it appears on the approach plate.
• The active leg (or the portion of the approach
currently in use) is depicted in magenta on the
Map Page. As you fly the approach, the 500Wseries unit automatically sequences through each
leg of the approach unless “SUSP” appears above
the OBS key. “SUSP” indicates that automatic
sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended on
the current leg and normally appears at holding
patterns and upon crossing the missed approach
point (MAP).
side of the FAF, automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended and the SUSP annunciation will appear.
Automatic waypoint sequencing will resume once
the aircraft is on the “TO” side of the FAF and within
full-scale deflection. This is a new feature with the
500W-series.
• For all approaches and departures, make sure to
recheck the runway, transition, and all waypoints.
If ATC directs you to make a change, recheck each
element again.
Points to Remember for Localizer or VORbased Approaches
• The default factory setting allows the CDI output to
automatically switch from the GPS receiver to the
LOC receiver. This may be changed to manual in
some installations. If the “ILS CDI Selection” setting
is changed to “Manual”, you must determine when
to select “GPS” or “VLOC” guidance during the
approach. Remember, “VLOC” is required for the
final course segment from Final Approach Fix (FAF)
to MAP.
“SUSP” indicates that automatic sequencing
of approach waypoints is suspended. In some
instances “SUSP” automatically cancels (holding pattern entry). In other cases, press OBS to
manually cancel.
If the ILS CDI Capture setting is changed to
“Manual”, you must select VLOC guidance
manually by pressing the CDI key.
• For roll steering autopilots: roll steering is terminated when approach mode is selected on the
autopilot and is available once the missed approach
is initiated.
• If Vectors-to-Final is activated while on the “FROM”
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: Installations with certain autopilots, such as the
KAP 140 and KFC225, do not allow automatic ILS CDI
switching.
NOTE: GPS level of service annunciations (LPV, ENR,
etc. as shown on page 83) are not applicable to the
external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
113
5 - PROCEDURES
Enabling Autopilot Outputs
• If the CDI output has not automatically switched
from GPS to ILS upon reaching the FAF, you must
manually switch to the VLOC receiver by pressing
the CDI key. Verify that “VLOC” is displayed directly
above to the CDI key.
• Automatic switching of CDI output is available
for ILS, localizer, SDF and LDA approaches. Automatic CDI switching is not available for backcourse
approaches or VOR approaches.
• When flying an approach with the autopilot-coupled,
you must monitor system functions at all times and
verify that the autopilot and external CDI (or HSI)
switch to the VLOC receiver with sufficient time to
capture and track the approach course. Switching
to “VLOC” late in the approach may not provide the
autopilot enough time to respond and intercept the
approach course prior to the FAF (depending upon
the performance characteristics of your autopilot and
aircraft). In such instances, you should manually fly
the approach or refer to the documentation provided
with your autopilot.
• When an ILS or VOR approach is first selected or
executed, the frequency is automatically checked.
If the frequency is correct, you will not receive a
message regarding the frequency. If the frequency
is incorrect, you will receive a message and you
must place the ILS or VLOC frequency in the active
frequency field.
114
When an ILS approach is first selected, the
ILS frequency is automatically placed in
the standby VLOC frequency field. Press the
VLOC flip-flop key to use this frequency.
• When flying a localizer-based approach
(other than backcourse) with automatic CDI
switching enabled:
1. “GPS” guidance may be used while flying
outbound and on the initial portion of the
procedure turn.
2. “VLOC” guidance is used on the remainder of
the approach from the time you turn inbound
on the procedure turn.
3.
The localizer frequency must be active to use
“VLOC” guidance at the MAP. Press the CDI
key to switch back to GPS data when the
missed approach is initiated.
• When flying a localizer-based approach with automatic CDI switching disabled:
190-00357-00 Rev C
5 - PROCEDURES
before using your autopilot for an approach.
“VLOC” must appear in the lower left corner
(above the CDI key) in order to use the
VLOC receiver with your external CDI and
autopilot.
1.
3.
Press PROC. Highlight “Enable A/P APR Outputs?” with the large right knob, if necessary,
and press ENT.
4.
Press the Approach button on the autopilot to
switch it to Approach mode. Your autopilot will
now use guidance from the 500W-series unit
for the approach.
190-00357-00 Rev C
115
You may select “VLOC” guidance at any point
on the approach prior to reaching the FAF.
2.
The localizer frequency must be active to use
“VLOC” guidance.
Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King
KAP140/KFC225
Autopilot outputs for the King KAP140/KFC225
autopilots are activated manually by the pilot after being
prompted during the approach procedure. After enabling
outputs, the 500W-series unit will provide guidance
information consistent with what the autopilot expects
(i.e., angular CDI scaling and glideslope capture for an
LPV or other vertically guided GPS approach).
Conditions for autopilot outputs
1.
2.
The 500W-series unit must be configured during
installation to interface with these autopilots and
using “Prompt” for GPS Select.
Guidance to the FAF is active as indicated by Approach
mode annunciation (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, or LPV).
To enable autopilot outputs
1.
2.
Load and activate approach information as
usual.
When you are turned on course to the FAF (Track
and Desired Track are within 10°), a message
will prompt you to enable the autopilot outputs
5 - PROCEDURES
Blank Page
116
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
WPT Page Group
WPT Page Group
Section 6
WPT Pages
To quickly select a WPT page:
Section 2 introduced the 500W-series unit main
page groups — NAV, WPT, AUX, NRST — and
described each page in the NAV group. This second
page group (WPT) provides information for the
thousands of airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections,
runways, frequencies and procedures stored on
your Jeppesen NavData® card. A WPT page is also
provided to display information for up to 1,000
user-created waypoints.
1.
From any page, press and hold CLR to select
the Default NAV Page. (You may skip this step
if you are already viewing any of the main
pages.)
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the WPT
page group. “WPT” appears in the lower right
corner of the screen.
3.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
WPT page.
The WPT page group includes ten pages. While
viewing any WPT page, turn the small right knob to
select a different WPT page. The first six pages provide
detailed information for the selected airport: location, runways, frequencies, approaches, arrivals, and
departures. The last four pages provide information for
intersections, NDBs, VORs and user-created waypoints.
NAV
WPT
AUX
NRST
5+ available pages
(see Section 2)
10 available pages
(see list below)
3 available pages
(see Section 9)
8 available pages
(see Section 7)
Airport Location
Airport Runway
Airport Frequency
Airport Approach
Airport Arrival
Airport Departure
Intersection
NDB
VOR
User Waypoint
190-00357-00 Rev C
117
6 - WPT PAGES
Finding the Desired Airport
Finding the Desired Airport
Your 500W-series unit uses ICAO identifiers for all
airports. All U.S. airport identifiers which contain only
letters use the prefix “K”. For example, Los Angeles
International is KLAX under the ICAO standard. Other
airports, such as Otten Memorial (3VS), that contain
numbers in the identifier, do not require the “K”
prefix. Alaska, Hawaii and many foreign countries use
two letter prefixes.
4.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
character.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the identifier is
selected, then press ENT.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the small
right knob. If duplicate waypoints exist, see
the following pages for a description.
Airports, NDBs and VORs may be selected by
identifier, facility name or city location.
6.
If you encounter difficulty when selecting an airport, try retrieving the desired airport using the facility
name or the city in which it is located.
After a WPT page is selected, information for a
waypoint may be viewed by entering the identifier (or
name) of the desired waypoint.
Enter a waypoint’s facility name or city location on the top or middle line of the “Facility,
City & Region” data field (this option applies
to airports, VORs and NDBs only).
To enter a waypoint facility name or city location:
Enter a waypoint identifier on the top line
of any WPT page (using the small and large
right knobs). Once entered, the database
information for the selected waypoint is
displayed.
To enter a waypoint identifier:
118
1.
Select the desired WPT page and press the
small right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the small right knob to select the first
character of the waypoint’s identifier.
3.
Turn the large right knob to select the next
character field.
1.
Select the Airport Location Page, NDB Page or
VOR Page from the WPT page group.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to select the facility
name or location (city) field.
4.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
character.
5.
Turn the large right knob to select the next
character field.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the facility name or
location is selected, then press ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Duplicate Waypoints
7.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the small
right knob.
Duplicate Waypoints
Once the identifier, facility name or location is
entered, all six airport pages display information for
the selected airport. As you enter an identifier, facility
name or location, the Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls
through the database, displaying those waypoints
matching the characters you have entered to that point.
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or
location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small right knob during the selection
process. If duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier, a duplicate waypoint page appears once you select
the identifier (by pressing ENT).
To select a facility name or city location, where
duplicate entries exist:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the desired facility name or location.
As you spell the facility name or location,
using the small and large right knobs, the
500W-series unit Spell’N’Find feature selects
the first entry in the database based upon the
characters you have entered up to that point.
Continue turning the small right knob to scroll
through any additional database listings for the
selected facility name or location. You can scroll
backwards with the small right knob if you
scroll past the desired facility name or location.
Press ENT to select the desired facility name
or location.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the small
right knob.
To select a waypoint identifier from a list of
duplicates:
When selecting a waypoint by identifier, a
Duplicate Waypoints window may appear,
allowing you to select desired waypoint by
type and region.
1.
2.
When selecting a waypoint by facility name or city, you can
scroll through duplicate entries by continuing to turn the small
right knob.
3.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Select the desired airport or navaid identifier.
A Duplicate Waypoints window appears. Turn
the large right knob to select the desired
waypoint and press ENT.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the small
right knob.
119
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Location
Airport Location Page
The Airport Location Page displays the latitude,
longitude, and elevation of the selected airport. The
Airport Location Page also displays facility name and
location, as well as fuel availability, best available
instrument approach, radar coverage and airspace type.
Identifier, Symbol
and Type
• Radar — Radar coverage: Yes or No
• Airspace — Control environment: Class C,
CTA, TMA, TRSA, Class B or
none
Facility Name and
Location (City)
Field Elevation
Available Fuels
Radar Availability
Airport Location Page indicating radar
coverage and airspace type. The Airport Location Page also indicates the best available
approach for the selected airport. To see
additional approach information, select the
Airport Approach Page.
Airspace Type
First Page in
WPT Group
Latitude/Longitude Best Available Approach
Position
and Radar Coverage
The following descriptions and abbreviations are
used:
• Type — Usage type: Public, Military,
Heliport, or Private
• Position — Latitude/Longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/minutes/seconds),
MGRS or UTM/UPS
• Elevation — In feet or meters
• Fuel — For public-use airports, the
available fuel type(s) are: Avgas
(80-87/100LL/100-130/Mogas),
Jet, or None
• Approach — Best available approach: ILS, MLS,
LOC, LDA, SDF, GPS, VOR, RNAV
(“RNV”), LORAN (“LOR”), NDB,
TACAN (“TCN”), Helicopter
(“HEL”), or VFR
120
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: Upon active navigation changes, the active
destination airport is used as the default airport on the
WPT pages. Manual selection of the destination airport
is available from the page menu.
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Runways
Airport Location Page Options
Airport Runway Page
The Airport Runway Page displays runway designations, length, surface type and lighting for the
selected airport. A map image of the runway layout
and surrounding area is also displayed on the Airport
Runway Page. The map image scale appears in the
lower left corner and is adjustable using the RNG key.
For airports with multiple runways, information for
each runway is available.
Select Next FPL Apt?
Selecting the Next Airport page menu option
allows you to display the next waypoint in the
flight plan.
Identifier, Symbol
and Type
Map Image
Runway
Designations
Runway Length
and Width
Select “Select Next FPL Apt?” to display the
next airport in the flight plan.
Runway Surface
Lighting, and
Lighting Availability
Second Page in
WPT Group
Select Destination Apt?
Selecting the Destination Airport page menu option
allows you to display the Destination waypoint in
the flight plan.
To display information for each additional
runway:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
on the “Runway” designation field.
Select “Select Destination Apt?” to display
the destination airport of the flight plan.
190-00357-00 Rev C
121
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Runways
3.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
listing all runways for the selected airport.
4.
Continue turning the small right knob to
select the desired runway.
5.
Press ENT to display information for the
selected runway on the Airport Runway Page.
Airport Runway Page Options
Select Next FPL Apt?
As described earlier in this section.
Select Destination Apt?
As described earlier in this section.
To adjust the scale of the map image:
6.
122
To remove the flashing cursor, press the small
right knob.
1.
Press the down arrow side of the RNG key to
display a smaller map area.
2.
Press the up arrow side of the RNG key to
display a larger map area.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are
used on the Airport Runway Page:
• Type — Usage type: Public, Military, Heliport, or
Private
• Surface — Runway surface types include: Hard,
Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Lighting — Runway lighting types include: No
Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown or Frequency (for pilot-controlled lighting)
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Frequencies
Airport Frequency Page
The Airport Frequency Page displays radio frequencies and frequency types for the selected airport,
as well as sector and altitude restrictions (where
applicable). If the selected airport has a localizer-based
approach, the localizer frequency(s) is also listed on
the Airport Frequency Page. The Airport Frequency
Page may be used to quickly select and tune a COM or
VLOC frequency.
To scroll through the frequency list and tune to a
desired frequency on the list (tuning is only available
with the GNS 530W or 530AW):
Identifier, Symbol
Frequency Type
and Type
Selected
Frequency
Additional
information is
available
Third Page in
WPT Group
Listed communication frequencies include
ATIS, clearance delivery, ground control,
tower, unicom, approach and departure. The
“RX” next to ATIS identifies it as a “receive
only” frequency.
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through the
list, placing the cursor on the desired frequency.
If there are more frequencies in the list than can
be displayed on the screen, a scroll bar along
the right-hand side of the screen indicates
where you are within the list.
3.
Press ENT to place the selected frequency
in the standby field of the COM or VLOC
window.
4.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the small
right knob.
Some listed frequencies may include designations
for limited usage, as follows:
“TX” - transmit only
“RX” - receive only
“PT” - part time frequency
Navigation frequencies for ILS and localizer
(LOC) also appear on the list.
If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions,
the frequency is preceded by an “Info?” designation.
190-00357-00 Rev C
123
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Frequencies
To view usage restrictions for a frequency:
1.
Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
on the “Info?” designation directly to the left
of the desired frequency.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used
on the Airport Frequency Page:
• Frequency Type — Usage type: Public, Military,
Heliport, or Private
• Frequency — Communication frequencies which may include
restrictions:
When “Info? appears to the left of a displayed frequency, the frequency has usage
restrictions.
2.
Approach
Arrival
Class B
Class C CTA
Departure
TMA
Terminal
Communication frequencies without restrictions:
Press ENT to display the restriction information.
ATIS
ASOS
AWOS
Center
Clearance
Gate
Control
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Pre-taxi
Radar
Ramp
Other
Tower
Unicom
Navigation frequencies:
To display the usage restrictions, highlight
“Info?” and press ENT. A pop-up window
displays the restriction information.
3.
ILS
LOC
Airport Frequency Page Options
Select Next FPL Apt?
To return to the Airport Frequency Page, press
ENT.
As described earlier in this section.
Select Destination Apt?
As described earlier in this section.
124
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Approaches
Airport Approach Page
The Airport Approach Page shows the available
approach procedures for the selected airport. Where
multiple initial approach fixes (IAFs) and feeder routes
are available, that information may also be displayed.
A map image provides a layout diagram for each
approach and transition.
If a WAAS approach has been selected, the WAAS
approach ID is displayed in the top left corner of the
map. The approach service level is shown in the lower
right corner of the map. Service level annunciations
available are: LPV, L/VNAV, LNAV+V, or LNAV.
WAAS
approach
ID
Identifier, Symbol
and Type
Approach
Procedure Name
With the cursor on the
“APPROACH” name field, turn the small right
knob to select the desired procedure and
press ENT.
4.
Press ENT. The cursor moves to the transitions
(TRANS) field.
5.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning
the small right knob to select the desired
transition or select “VECTORS” for guidance
only along the final course segment of the
approach.
Transitions: IAFs,
Feeder Routes and
Vectors-to-Final
WAAS service level
Map Image
Fourth Page in
WPT Group
To scroll through the available approaches and
transitions:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
on the APPROACH procedure name field.
3.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
of available approaches for the selected airport.
Continue turning the small right knob to
select the desired approach.
With the cursor on the “TRANS” field, turn
the small right knob to select the desired
transition. Select “VECTORS” for guidance
only along the final course segment of the
approach.
6.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Press ENT. To remove the flashing cursor, press
the small right knob.
125
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Approach Options
NOTE: Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use. As you select an approach, a
“GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name
indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation,
meaning the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. ILS approaches, for
example, must be flown by tuning the VLOC receiver to
the proper frequency and coupling the VLOC receiver to
the external CDI (or HSI).
Airport Approach Page Options
The following options are available for the Airport
Approach Page, by pressing the MENU key:
Load into Active FPL? allows you to load the
selected approach into the active flight plan —
without activating it. This performs the same
operation as selecting “Load?” from the Procedures
Page “Select Approach?” option.
To load an approach from the Airport Approach
Page:
1.
Select the desired approach and transition.
2.
Press MENU to display the Airport Approach
Page Options.
From the Airport Approach Page, press MENU to display an options list. Select “Load into Active FPL?” to load the approach
for later use.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Load
into Active FPL?” and press ENT.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page appears. Press FPL
to return to the Airport Approach Page.
Load and Activate? allows you to load the
selected approach into the active flight plan and
activate navigation guidance to the approach
transition.
126
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Approach Options
To load and activate an approach from the Airport
Approach Page, follow the steps above, but select
“Load and Activate?” in step #3.
To select an approach channel from the Airport
Approach Page:
1.
Press MENU to display the Airport Approach
Page Options.
2.
Turn the small or large right knob to highlight “Select Approach Chnl? and then press
ENT.
3.
Turn the small right knob to change values
and the large right knob to move the cursor.
After selecting the WAAS approach channel,
press ENT.
4.
Select the desired transition and press ENT.
Select “Load and Activate?” to immediately
begin using the approach waypoints for
navigation guidance.
Select Approach Chnl? allows you to select the
channel number for a WAAS approach for the
current destination. The channel number for the
WAAS approach is available from an approved
approach chart.
If duplicate numbers are available for a channel,
a list will be available where you may select the
desired approach.
To select the next FPL airport from the Airport
Approach Page:
As described earlier in this section.
To select the Destination airport from the Airport
Approach Page:
As described earlier in this section.
After selecting “Select Approach Chnl?”,
choose the WAAS channel number for the
current destination.
After selecting the Approach Channel, the WAAS
approach ID will be shown in the top left corner of
the map display.
190-00357-00 Rev C
127
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Arrivals
Airport Arrival Page
3.
The Airport Arrival Page shows the available
Airport Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) procedures
for the selected airport. Where multiple transitions
or runways are associated with the arrival procedure,
that information may also be displayed. A map image
provides a layout diagram for each arrival, transition
and runway.
Turn the small right knob to display a
window of available arrivals for the selected
airport. Continue turning the small right
knob to select the desired arrival.
4.
Press ENT. The cursor moves to the transitions
(TRANS) field.
5.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
small right knob to select the desired transition.
Identifier, Symbol
and Type
Map Image
Arrival
Procedure Name
Transitions
Runways Associated
with Arrival
Fifth Page in
WPT Group
To scroll through the available arrivals:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
on the “ARRIVAL” procedure name field.
With the cursor on the “TRANS” field, turn
the small right knob to display a list of available transitions.
6.
Press ENT. The cursor moves to the runway
field.
7.
Turn the small right knob to display a
window of available runways. Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired
runway.
With the cursor on the “ARRIVAL” field, turn
the small right knob to display a list of available arrival procedures.
128
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Arrivals
From the Airport Arrival Page, press MENU
to display an options list. “Load into Active
FPL?” allows you to add the arrival procedure
to your flight plan for later use.
With the “RUNWAY” field highlighted, turn
the small right knob to select the desired
runway. Many arrivals apply to all runways for
a particular airport, as indicated by “ALL”.
8.
NOTE: “ALL” may appear in the runway field, indicating the arrival procedure applies to all runways. For
airports with parallel runways, “B” may appear at the
end of the runway designation to indicate the arrival
procedure applies to both runways.
3.
Press ENT to select the “Load into Active FPL?”
option.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page appears. Press FPL
to return to the Airport Arrival Page.
Press ENT. To remove the flashing cursor, press
the small right knob.
Airport Arrival Page Options
The following option is available for the Airport
Arrival Page, by pressing the MENU key:
Load into Active FPL? allows you to load the
selected arrival into the active flight plan. This is
identical to loading an arrival procedure from the
Procedures Page.
To load an arrival procedure from the Airport
Arrival Page:
NOTE: Loading an arrival procedure into the active
flight plan does NOT automatically alter the active
flight plan leg or direct-to navigation. Once loaded, the
arrival is simply placed at the end of the flight plan. To
manually transition to a loaded arrival, please see the
procedure below (an alternative method would be to
remove the first occurrence of the destination airport
identifier).
Select Next FPL Apt?
As described earlier in this section.
Select Destination Apt?
As described earlier in this section.
1.
Select the desired arrival, transition and runway
using the steps above.
2.
Press MENU to display the Airport Arrival Page
Options.
190-00357-00 Rev C
129
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Departures
To manually transition to a loaded arrival procedure:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
small right knob to activate the cursor and
scroll down through the list of loaded arrival
waypoints.
2.
When the desired loaded arrival waypoint is
highlighted, press the direct-to key, then
press ENT to highlight the 'Activate?' prompt
(note that any loaded arrival waypoint may be
selected).
3.
Airport Departure Page
The Airport Departure Page shows the available
Airport Departure Procedures (DPs; also referred to as
SIDs) for the selected airport. Where multiple runways
or transitions are associated with the departure procedure, that information may also be displayed. A map
image provides a layout diagram for each departure,
runway and transition.
Identifier, Symbol
and Type
Map Image
Departure
Procedure Name
Press ENT again to confirm activation.
Runways Associated
with Departure
Transitions
Sixth Page in
WPT Group
To scroll through the available departures:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
on the departure (DEP) procedure name field.
With the cursor on the “DEP” field, turn the
small right knob to display a list of available
departure procedures.
130
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Airport Departures
3.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
of available departures for the selected airport.
Continue turning the small right knob to
select the desired departure.
4.
Press ENT. The cursor moves to the runway
field.
5.
Turn the small right knob to display a
window of available runways. Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired
runway.
With the “TRANS” field highlighted, turn
the small right knob to select the desired
transition.
8.
Press ENT. To remove the flashing cursor, press
the small right knob.
Airport Departure Page Options
The following option is available for the Airport
Departure Page, by pressing the MENU key:
Load into Active FPL?
With the cursor on the “RUNWAY” field, turn
the small right knob to display a list of available runways.
As described earlier in this section.
NOTE: “ALL” may appear in the runway field, indicating the departure procedure applies to all runways.
For airports with parallel runways, “B” may appear
at the end of the runway designation to indicate the
departure procedure applies to both runways.
As described earlier in this section.
Select Next FPL Apt?
6.
Press ENT. The cursor moves to the transitions
(TRANS) field.
7.
Turn the small right knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
small right knob to select the desired transition.
Select Destination Apt?
As described earlier in this section.
190-00357-00 Rev C
131
6 - WPT PAGES
Intersections
To load a departure procedure from the Airport
Departure Page:
1.
Select the desired departure, runway and transition using the steps above.
2.
Press MENU to display the Airport Departure
Page Options.
Intersection Page
The Intersection Page displays the latitude, longitude, region and country for the selected intersection.
The Intersection Page also displays the identifier, radial
and distance from the nearest VOR, VORTAC or VOR/
DME. There are no options for the Intersection page.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used:
Nearest VOR and Symbol
Identifier and
Symbol
Region/Country
Latitude/Longitude
Position
From the Airport Departure Page, press
MENU to display an options list. “Load into
Active FPL?” allows you to add the departure
procedure to the beginning of your flight
plan.
Seventh Page in
WPT Group
Radial and Distance
from Nearest VOR
3.
Press ENT to select the “Load into Active FPL?”
option.
• Position — Latitude/Longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/minutes/seconds),
MGRS or UTM/UPS
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page appears. Press FPL
to return to the Airport Departure Page.
• RAD — Radial from nearest VOR in degrees
magnetic or degrees true (depending upon unit configuration)
• DIS — Distance from nearest VOR, in
nautical miles/statute miles/kilometers (depending upon unit configuration)
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Page
is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR used to
define the intersection.
Intersections may only be selected by identifier.
132
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
NDBs
NDB Page
The NDB page displays the facility name, city,
region/country, latitude and longitude for the selected
NDB. The NDB page also displays the frequency and a
weather broadcast indication (if applicable). There are
no options for the NDB page. The following descriptions and abbreviations are used:
Identifier and
Symbol
Latitude/Longitude
Position
Facility Name, City
and Region/Country
To display information for an NDB, highlight
the identifier field. Then use the small and
large right knobs to enter the NDB’s
identifier.
Frequency and Weather
Broadcast Indication
Eighth Page in
WPT Group
• Symbol — For a graphic illustration of
available NDB symbols, see Sec 2
- Nav Pages - Map Page
• Position — Latitude/Longitude (degrees/
minutes or degrees/minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• FREQ — Frequency in kilohertz (kHz)
• Wx Brdcst — Weather information is broadcast
on the selected facility’s frequency
NDBs may be selected by identifier, facility name
or location (city).
190-00357-00 Rev C
133
6 - WPT PAGES
VORs
VOR Page
The VOR Page displays the facility name, city,
region/country, magnetic variation, latitude and longitude for the selected VOR. The VOR Page also displays the frequency and a weather broadcast indication
(if applicable). There are no options for the VOR page.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used:
VORs may be selected by identifier, facility name
or location (city). The VOR Page may also be used to
quickly tune the VLOC receiver to the selected VOR’s
frequency.
Identifier and
Symbol
Facility Name, City
and Region/Country
Latitude/Longitude
Position
Magnetic
Variation
Frequency
and Weather
Broadcast
Indication
Ninth Page in
WPT Group
• Symbol — See Section 2 Nav Pages - Map
Page for a graphic illustration of
available VOR symbols
• VAR — Magnetic variation in degrees
• Position — Latitude/Longitude (degrees/
minutes or degrees/minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• FREQ — Frequency in megahertz (MHz)
• Wx Brdcst — Weather information is broadcast
on the selected facility’s frequency
134
190-00357-00 Rev C
To display information for a VOR, highlight
the identifier field. Then use the small and
large right knobs to enter the VOR’s
identifier.
6 - WPT PAGES
User Waypoints
To select a VOR frequency from the VOR Page:
User Waypoint Page
1.
Select the VOR Page from the WPT page
group.
2.
Press the small right knob momentarily to
place the cursor on the VOR identifier field. If
you wish to select another VOR, use the small
and large right knobs and press ENT when
finished.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
frequency field and press ENT to place the
frequency in the standby field of the VLOC
window.
In addition to the airport, VOR, NDB and intersection information contained in your Jeppesen NavData®
card, the 500W-series unit allows you to store up to
1,000 user-defined waypoints. The User Waypoint
Page displays the waypoint name (up to five characters long), identifier and radial from two reference
waypoints, distance from one reference waypoint,
along with the user waypoint’s latitude/longitude position.
User Waypoint
Name
Reference Waypoint
Information
Latitude/Longitude
Position
Create/Modify
Action Field
Tenth Page in
WPT Group
Using the large right knob, highlight the
VOR’s frequency and press ENT to place the
frequency in the standby VLOC frequency
field.
4.
To activate the standby VLOC frequency, press
the VLOC flip-flop key.
To display information for a user waypoint,
highlight the name field. Then use the small
and large right knobs to enter the waypoint
name.
190-00357-00 Rev C
135
6 - WPT PAGES
Creating User Waypoints
The following descriptions and abbreviations
appear on the User Waypoint Page:
• REF WPT — Reference waypoint identifier
(name)
• RAD — Radial from reference waypoint,
in degrees magnetic or degrees
true (depending upon unit configuration)
• DIS — Distance from reference
waypoint, in nautical miles/statute miles/kilometers (depending
upon unit configuration)
• Position — Latitude/Longitude (degrees/
minutes or degrees/minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint. When you
press ENT, your present position automatically appears in the “Position” field.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
position field at the bottom of the page.
User waypoints may only be selected by name
(identifier).
Creating User Waypoints
User waypoints may be created from the User
Waypoint Page or the Map Page. To create a new
user waypoint, simply enter its name (identifier) and
position, or reference another waypoint by radial and
distance.
To create a new user waypoint by entering its
latitude/longitude position:
136
1.
With the User Waypoint Page displayed, press
the small right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press ENT.
Your present position appears in the position
field at the bottom of the page. To create a
waypoint at your present position, turn the
large right knob to highlight “Create?” and
skip to step #6.
To enter a different position, highlight the
position field and use the small and large
right knobs to enter the new position
coordinates.
4.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter the
position coordinates for the new waypoint.
5.
Press ENT to accept the selected position.
6.
The cursor moves to “Create?”. Press ENT to
add the new waypoint to memory.
7.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Creating User Waypoints
To create a new user waypoint by referencing an
existing waypoint:
1.
With the User Waypoint Page displayed, press
the small right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Use the small and large right knobs to
enter a name for the new waypoint and press
ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the first
reference waypoint (REF WPT) field.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of the
reference waypoint. Press ENT and the cursor moves to the
radial (RAD) field.
4.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the identifier of the reference waypoint. The
reference waypoint can be an airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or another user waypoint.
Press ENT to accept the selected identifier.
5.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Use
the small and large right knobs to enter
the radial from the reference waypoint to the
new user waypoint. Press ENT to accept the
selected radial.
NOTE: The 500W-series units allow you to create
a new user waypoint at a defined radial and
distance from your present position. To reference
your present position, follow the steps above,
but press CLR in step #4. “P.POS” appears in the
reference waypoint (REF WPT) field to indicate
that radial and distance information references
your present position.
The second reference waypoint field (REF WPT)
is a temporary reference only — not a reference that is stored with the user waypoint. You
may also use this in conjunction with the first
reference waypoint to create a position using the
intersection of two radials. By default, this field
displays a radial from the nearest VOR. However,
you can select any waypoint — by identifier
— to use as a reference in this field.
Your 500W-series unit can store user-defined
waypoints which are generated from other equipment in your panel. For example, an EFIS equipped
with joystick inputs can be used to create user
waypoints which (if your installation supports this)
automatically transfer to your 500W-series unit.
6.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the distance from the reference waypoint to the
new user waypoint. Press ENT to accept the
selected distance.
7.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Create?” and press ENT.
8.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
190-00357-00 Rev C
137
6 - WPT PAGES
Creating User Waypoints
Creating User Waypoints from the Map Page
The Map Page and panning target pointer provide a
quick means of saving your present position as a userdefined waypoint.
To capture and save your present position as a
user waypoint:
1.
With the Map Page displayed, press the small
right knob to activate the panning function.
The target pointer appears at your present
position.
2.
Press ENT to capture the pointer’s position and
display the User Waypoint Page.
The Map Page can be used to create a user
waypoint, by panning to the desired location
and pressing ENT.
From the Nav Map Page, press ENT to mark a
location for a User Wpt.
138
3.
A four-digit number is automatically assigned
as the waypoint’s name. If the cursor is touching a named feature, an abbreviation of the
feature name will be offered for the User
waypoint name. To change this name, turn the
large right knob to highlight the name field,
then use the small and large right knobs
to select a new name. Press ENT to accept
the selected name. Use the large right knob
to move the cursor to the “Create?” action
field.
4.
With “Create?” highlighted, press ENT to save
the new waypoint. The User Wpt is now shown
on the map page.
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
Modifying User Waypoints
6.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
To modify a user waypoint by changing reference
waypoint information:
Modifying User Waypoints
To modify an existing waypoint, select that
waypoint on the User Waypoint Page and enter the
new position information directly over the old information.
1.
With the User Waypoint Page displayed, press
the small right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the name of the desired waypoint and press
ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
first reference waypoint (REF WPT) field, if
you wish to change the reference waypoint.
Otherwise, continue turning the large right
knob to highlight the radial (RAD) or distance
(DIS) field, as desired.
From the User Waypoint Page, use the small
and large right knobs to modify the position
coordinates of an existing user waypoint.
To modify a user waypoint by changing its latitude/longitude position:
1.
With the User Waypoint Page displayed, press
the small right knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the name of the desired waypoint and press
ENT.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
position field at the bottom of the page.
4.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the new position coordinates and press ENT
to accept the selected position.
5.
The cursor moves to the “Modify?” action field.
Press ENT to modify the waypoint.
You can modify the location of an existing waypoint by changing the reference
waypoint and/or by changing the radial and
distance.
4.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Use the small and large right knobs to
change the identifier — if desired — of the
reference waypoint. The reference waypoint
can be an airport, VOR, NDB, intersection or
another user waypoint. Press ENT to accept
the selected identifier.
139
6 - WPT PAGES
User Waypoint Options
5.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Use
the small and large right knobs to change the
radial from the reference waypoint, if desired.
Press ENT to accept the selected radial.
User Waypoint Page Options
The following User Waypoint Page Options are
available by pressing the MENU key (with the User
Waypoint Page displayed):
View User Waypoint List? displays a list of all
user waypoints currently stored in memory.
To view a list of all user waypoints:
1.
From the User Waypoint Page, press MENU to
display the User Waypoint Page Options.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “View
User Waypoint List?” and press ENT.
With the radial (RAD) field highlighted, use
the small and large right knobs to enter a
new radial from the reference waypoint.
6.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field. Use
the small and large right knobs to change
the distance from the reference waypoint to
the new user waypoint, if desired. Press ENT
to accept the selected distance.
7.
The cursor moves to the “Modify?” action field.
Press ENT to modify the waypoint.
8.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
140
NOTE: If you attempt to modify or delete a
waypoint which is currently a direct-to waypoint
or the current “from” or “to” waypoint in the
active flight plan, the 500W-series unit alerts you
with a “Can’t change an active waypoint” or
“Waypoint is active and can’t be deleted” message. You must first cancel the direct-to or remove
the waypoint(s) from the active flight plan before
modifying or deleting the waypoint(s).
Select “View User Waypoint List?” to display
a list of all user waypoints currently stored
in memory.
3.
The top of the User Waypoint List indicates the
total number of user waypoints currently used
and available memory. If more user waypoints
are stored than can be displayed on a single
screen, turn the large right knob to scroll
through the User Waypoint List.
4.
Press the small right knob to return to the
User Waypoint Page.
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
User Waypoint List
Delete User Waypoint? allows you to delete the
selected waypoint from memory.
To delete a user waypoint:
1.
Select the desired waypoint on the User
Waypoint Page and press MENU to display
the User Waypoint Page Options.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select “Delete
User Waypoint?” and press ENT. Press ENT
again to confirm.
User Waypoint List
The User Waypoint List allows you to review,
modify, rename or delete a selected user waypoint, or
to delete all user waypoints currently stored in memory.
At the top of the page are indications for number of
waypoint locations used and available memory.
To review and/or modify a user waypoint from the
User Waypoint List:
Select “Delete User Waypoint?” to delete
the selected waypoint from memory.
1.
Select the User Waypoint List.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired user waypoint.
3.
Press ENT to display the User Waypoint Page
for the selected waypoint. From this page
you may review all information defining the
waypoint and its position.
4.
To modify the waypoint’s position or reference
waypoint information. (Keep in mind that
you’ve already selected a User Waypoint Page
which displays the desired user waypoint, so
you may skip the first two steps of the procedure example.)
5.
To exit the User Waypoint Page, turn the large
right knob to highlight “Done?” and press
ENT.
Crossfill? allows you to transfer user waypoints
between two 400W/500W-series units in a dual
unit installation.
190-00357-00 Rev C
141
6 - WPT PAGES
User Waypoint List
To rename a user waypoint from the User
Waypoint List:
To delete a user waypoint from the User Waypoint
List:
1.
Select the User Waypoint List.
1.
Select the User Waypoint List.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired user waypoint.
Use the small and large right knobs to
change the name of the user waypoint. (Enter
the new name directly over the old name.)
Press ENT to accept the new name.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired user waypoint.
3.
Press CLR to display a “Delete Waypoint”
confirmation window.
4.
With “Yes?” highlighted, press ENT to delete
the selected user waypoint.
3.
From the User Waypoint List, use the small and large right
knobs to rename an existing waypoint. Press ENT to display a
“Rename Waypoint” confirmation window.
4.
142
With the desired waypoint highlighted on the User Waypoint
List, press CLR to display a “Delete Waypoint” window.
A “Rename Waypoint” confirmation window is
displayed. With “Yes?” highlighted, press ENT
to rename the selected user waypoint.
190-00357-00 Rev C
6 - WPT PAGES
User Waypoint List
To delete all user waypoints from memory:
1.
Select the User Waypoint List.
2.
Press MENU to display an options window for
the User Waypoint List.
With the User Waypoint List displayed, press
MENU to display an options window with
“Delete All User Waypoints?” highlighted.
3.
With “Delete All User Waypoints” highlighted,
press ENT.
4.
A “Delete all waypoints in user waypoint
list” confirmation window is displayed. With
“Yes?” highlighted, press ENT to delete all
user waypoints from memory.
A “Delete all waypoints in user waypoint
list” confirmation window allows you
to verify your intent to remove ALL user
waypoints from memory.
190-00357-00 Rev C
143
6 - WPT PAGES
Blank Page
144
190-00357-00 Rev C
7 - NRST PAGES
NRST Page Group
Section 7
NRST Pages
NRST Page Group
Section 2 introduced the 500W-series unit main page groups — NAV, WPT, AUX, NRST — and described
each page in the NAV group. This fourth page group (NRST) provides detailed information for the 25 nearest
airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections and user waypoints within 200 NM of your current position. In addition, the
NRST pages include the five nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) and center (ARTCC/FIR) points of communication and alert you to any Special Use (SUA) or Controlled Airspace you may be in or near.
NAV
WPT
AUX
NRST
5+ available pages
(see Section 2)
10 available pages
(see Section 6)
4 available pages
(see Section 9)
8 available pages
(see list below)
Nearest Airport
Nearest Intersection
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest ARTCC
Nearest Flight Service
Nearest Airspace
In the GPS 500W, press NRST. In the GNS
530W, to display one of the NRST pages, start
from any main page — or press and hold CLR
to display the Default NAV Page...
Nearest User
...then, turn the large right knob to select the
NRST page group, as indicated by “NRST” at
the bottom of the screen. Turn the small right
knob to select the desired page within the
group.
190-00357-00 Rev C
145
7 - NRST PAGES
NRST Pages / Scrolling
To quickly select a NRST page:
In the GPS 500W, press NRST. For the GNS 530W,
do the following:
1. From any page, press and hold the CLR key
to select the Default NAV Page. (You may skip
this step if you are already viewing any of the
main pages.)
2. Turn the large right knob to select the NRST
page group. “NRST” appears at the bottom of
the screen.
To scroll through the list of nearest airports, VORs,
NDBs, intersections, user waypoints or airspaces:
1.
Select the desired NRST page, using the steps
outlined above.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through
the list. The scroll bar along the right-hand side
of the page indicates the part of the list that is
currently being viewed.
Turn the large right knob to select the NRST
page group. “NRST” appears at the bottom
of the screen.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
NRST page.
Not all 25 nearest airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections or user waypoints can be displayed on the
corresponding NRST page at one time. The Nearest
Airport Page displays detailed information for four
nearest airports, with a scroll bar along the right-hand
side of the page indicating the part of the list that is
currently being viewed. The Nearest Airspace Page displays detailed information for up to four special use or
controlled airspace alerts. The NRST pages for VORs,
NDBs, intersections, and user waypoints display eight
waypoints at a time. The flashing cursor and large
right knob are used to scroll and view the rest of the
waypoints or airspaces in the list.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through
a nearest list. The scroll bar along the righthand side of the page indicates where you
are in the list.
3.
146
4.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
The Nearest ARTCC and Nearest FSS Pages present
detailed information for up to five nearby facilities
— displaying only one facility at a time. Again, the
additional information is viewed using the flashing
cursor and small right knob to scroll through the list.
190-00357-00 Rev C
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearby Waypoints
To scroll through the list of nearest flight service station
or center points of communication:
Navigating to a Nearby Waypoint
The NRST pages can be used in conjunction with
the 500W-series unit direct-to function to quickly set
a course to a nearby facility. This feature can be a real
time saver compared to retrieving information from
the database using the WPT pages. More importantly,
it instantly provides navigation to the nearest airport in
case of an in-flight emergency.
To select a nearby airport, VOR, NDB, intersection
or user waypoint as a direct-to destination:
To scroll through the ARTCC or FSS frequencies, highlight the number adjacent to the
communication point name and turn the
small right knob.
1.
1.
Select the desired NRST page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the small right knob to scroll through
the list.
4.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
Use the flashing cursor to scroll through a NRST
page list and highlight the desired nearest
waypoint.
You can select a direct-to destination
directly from a NRST page (e.g. Nearest Airports) by highlighting the desired waypoint
and pressing the direct-to key.
2.
Press the direct-to key to display the Select
Direct-to Waypoint Page.
3.
Press ENT to accept the selected waypoint’s
identifier and press ENT a second time (with
“Activate?” highlighted) to begin navigating
to the selected waypoint.
190-00357-00 Rev C
147
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest Airports
Nearest Airport Page
The Nearest Airport Page displays the identifier,
symbol, bearing and distance to the 25 nearest airports
(within 200 nautical miles of your present position).
For each airport listed, the Nearest Airport Page also
indicates the best available approach, common traffic advisory frequency (CTAF) and the length of the
longest runway.
To quickly tune the common traffic advisory frequency (CTAF) from the Nearest Airport Page (GNS
530W only):
1.
Select the Nearest Airport Page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through the
list, highlighting the COM frequency associated
with the desired airport.
The Nearest Airport Page can be configured to
exclude shorter runways or undesirable runway
surface types, so that the corresponding airports do
not appear on the list. You may wish to use this feature
to exclude seaplane bases or runway lengths which
would be difficult or impossible to land upon.
The Nearest Airport Page may be used to quickly
tune the COM transceiver (GNS 530W only) to a
nearby airport. The selected frequency is placed in the
standby field of the COM window and activated using
the COM flip-flop key.
Airport Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing To
and Distance To
Tower or CTAF
Frequency and
Longest Runway
Scroll Bar
To quickly tune to a frequency on the Nearest
Airport Page, highlight the desired frequency
and press ENT.
4.
Press ENT to place the selected frequency in
the standby field of the COM window.
5.
Press the COM flip-flop key to activate the
selected frequency.
Best Available
Approach
First Page in
NRST Group
Press the COM flip-flop key to activate the
selected frequency.
148
190-00357-00 Rev C
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest Intersections and NDBs
6.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
6.
Additional communication frequencies, runway
information and more is available from the Nearest Airport Page by highlighting the identifier of the
desired airport and pressing ENT.
To return to the Nearest Airport Page, verify
that “Done?” is highlighted by the flashing
cursor and press ENT (or press CLR).
To view additional information for a nearby
airport:
1.
Select the Nearest Airport Page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through
the list, highlighting the identifier of the desired
airport.
To display additional database information, press the small
right knob to remove the cursor, then turn the small right knob
to select the desired page.
Nearest Intersection Page
The Nearest Intersection Page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing and distance to the 25 nearest
intersections (within 200 nautical miles of your present position).
To view additional information for a nearby intersection, start from the Nearest Intersection Page and
follow steps 2 through 4 above.
Highlight the identifier of the desired airport and press ENT to
display the database information — beginning with location
and fuel.
4.
Press ENT to display the Airport Location Page
for the selected airport.
5.
To view additional WPT pages for the selected
airport (including the Airport Runway and Airport Frequency Pages) press the small right
knob to remove the flashing cursor. Turn the
small right knob to display the additional
WPT pages. When finished, press the small
right knob to return the flashing cursor to the
screen.
Nearest NDB Page
The Nearest NDB Page displays the identifier,
symbol, bearing, distance and frequency to the 25
nearest NDBs (within 200 nautical miles of your present position).
To view additional information for a nearby NDB,
start from the Nearest NDB Page and follow steps
2 through 4 above.
190-00357-00 Rev C
149
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest VORs
Nearest VOR Page
The Nearest VOR Page displays the identifier,
symbol, bearing and distance to the 25 nearest VORs
(within 200 nautical miles of your present position).
For each VOR listed, the Nearest VOR Page also indicates the frequency and may be used to quickly tune
the VLOC receiver to the nearby VOR (GNS 530W
only). The selected frequency is placed in the standby
field of the VLOC window and activated using the
VLOC flip-flop key.
To quickly tune a VOR’s frequency from the
Nearest VOR Page, highlight the desired
frequency and press ENT. Press the VLOC flipflop key to activate the frequency.
Scroll Bar
VOR Frequency
Fourth Page in
NRST Group
VOR Identifier
and Symbol
Bearing To and
Distance To
To quickly tune a VOR’s frequency from the Nearest VOR Page (GNS 530W only):
150
1.
Select the Nearest VOR Page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through
the list, highlighting the frequency associated
with the desired VOR.
4.
Press ENT to place the selected frequency in
the standby field of the VLOC window.
5.
Press the VLOC flip-flop key to activate the
selected frequency.
6.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
To view additional information for a nearby VOR:
1.
Select the Nearest VOR Page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through
the list, highlighting the identifier of the desired
VOR.
4.
Press ENT to display the VOR page for the
selected VOR.
190-00357-00 Rev C
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest User WPT and ARTCC
ARTCC Name
Frequency(s)
Bearing To and
Distance To
Sixth Page in
NRST Group
To view additional information for a nearby
VOR, highlight the desired VOR on the list
and press ENT.
5.
6.
To quickly tune an ARTCC’s frequency from the
Nearest Center Page (GNS 530W only):
To return to the Nearest VOR Page, verify that
“Done?” is highlighted by the flashing cursor
and press ENT (or press CLR).
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
1.
Select the Nearest Center Page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the small right knob to scroll through
the list, selecting the desired ARTCC.
Nearest User Waypoint Page
The Nearest User Waypoint Page displays the
name, bearing and distance to the 25 nearest user
waypoints (within 200 nautical miles of your present
position).
Nearest Center (ARTCC) Page
The Nearest Center Page displays the facility name,
bearing to and distance to the five nearest ARTCC
points of communication (within 200 nautical miles
of your present position). For each ARTCC listed, the
Nearest Center Page also indicates the frequency(s)
and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver
to the center’s frequency. The selected frequency is
placed in the standby field of the COM window and
activated using the COM flip-flop key (GNS 530W
only).
Turn the small right knob to select the
desired center, then turn the large right knob
to highlight the desired frequency.
4.
Turn the large right knob to scroll down the
page, highlighting the desired frequency.
5.
Press ENT to place the selected frequency in
the standby field of the COM window.
190-00357-00 Rev C
151
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest FSS
FSS Name
Frequency(s)
VOR Identifier
(for duplex operation)
Seventh Page
in NRST Group
Press ENT to place the frequency on standby.
Press the COM flip-flop key to activate the
selected frequency.
To quickly tune an FSS’s frequency from the Nearest Flight Service Station Page (GNS 530W only):
6.
Press the COM flip-flop key to activate the
selected frequency.
7.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
1.
2.
3.
Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) Page
The Nearest Flight Service Station Page displays the
facility name, bearing to and distance to the five nearest FSS points of communication (within 200 nautical
miles of your present position). For each FSS listed,
the Nearest Flight Service Station Page also indicates
the frequency(s) and may be used to quickly tune the
COM transceiver to the FSS’s frequency. The selected
frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM
window and activated using the COM flip-flop key.
For duplex operations, “RX” and “TX” indications
appear beside the listed frequencies — indicating
“receive only” or “transmit only” frequencies. The associated VOR is also provided for reference.
Select the Nearest Flight Service Station
Page.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
Turn the small right knob to scroll through
the list, selecting the desired FSS.
Turn the small right knob to select the
desired FSS, then turn the large right knob to
highlight the desired frequency.
4.
5.
152
Bearing To and
Distance To
190-00357-00 Rev C
Turn the large right knob to scroll down
the page, highlighting the desired frequency
(COM frequency[s] or VOR frequency for duplex
operation.
Press ENT to place the selected frequency
in the standby field of the COM or VLOC
window.
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest Airspaces
Press ENT to place the frequency on standby.
Press the COM or VLOC flip-flop key to
activate the selected frequency.Navigation
frequencies for ILS and localizer (LOC) also
appear on the list.
“Airspace near and ahead” indicates that you
are within two nautical miles of an airspace
and projected to enter the airspace.
•
6.
Press COM or VLOC flip-flop key, as appropriate, to activate the selected frequency.
7.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
If you are within two nautical miles of an
airspace and your current course will not take
you inside, the message “Near airspace less
than 2nm” appears. The Nearest Airspace Page
shows “Within 2nm of airspace”.
Nearest Airspace Page
The last page in the NRST group, the Nearest Airspace Page, alerts you to as many as nine controlled or
special use airspaces near or in your flight path. Alerts
are provided according to the following conditions:
•
•
If your projected course will take you inside
an airspace within the next ten minutes, the
alert message “Airspace ahead -- less than 10
minutes” appears. The Nearest Airspace Page
shows the airspace as “Ahead”.
If you are within two nautical miles of an
airspace and your current course will take you
inside, the message “Airspace near and ahead”
appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows the
airspace as “Ahead < 2nm”.
“Near airspace less than 2NM” indicates
that you are within two nautical miles of an
airspace, but are NOT projected to enter the
airspace.
•
If you have entered an airspace, the message
“Inside Airspace” appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows “Inside of airspace”.
Note that the airspace alerts are based on threedimensional data (latitude, longitude and altitude) to
avoid nuisance alerts. The alert boundaries for con-
190-00357-00 Rev C
153
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest Airspaces
trolled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete
information on any nearby airspace. Once one of the
described conditions exists, the message annunciator
flashes, alerting you of an airspace message (if airspace
alert messages are enabled). See Sec 9 - Aux - Setup 1
- CDI / Alarms for more information.
To view additional details for an airspace listed
on the Nearest Airspace Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Airspace Page.
To view an airspace alert message:
1.
Status and
Time to Entry
When the message annunciator above the
MSG key flashes, press MSG.
Eighth Page
in NRST Group
Airspace Name
Message
Annunciator
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through
the list, highlighting the desired airspace.
Press MSG to view an airspace alert message.
Press MSG again to remove the message
window and return to the previous page.
2.
Press MSG again to return to the previous
page.
Once you have been provided an airspace alert
message, detailed information concerning the specific
airspace is provided on the Nearest Airspace Page.
The Nearest Airspace Page displays the airspace name,
status (“Ahead”, “Ahead < 2nm”, etc. as described on
the previous page), and a time to entry (if applicable).
By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest
Airspace Page, additional details are provided —
including controlling agency, communication frequencies and floor/ceiling limits.
154
STEP 3 & 4: From the Nearest Airspace Page,
highlight the desired airspace and press ENT
to display additional airspace information.
4.
Press ENT to display the Airspace Information
Page for the selected nearby airspace.
5.
To return to the Nearest Airspace Page, verify
that “Done?” is highlighted by the flashing
cursor and press ENT.
6.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
190-00357-00 Rev C
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest Airspaces
To view and quickly tune the frequency for a
controlling agency:
1.
Follow steps #1 through #4 on the previous
page to display the Airspace Information
Page for the desired controlled or special use
airspace.
“Done?” Field
(return to
previous page)
Turn the large right knob to select the
desired frequency. Press ENT to place the
frequency on standby.
Floor/Ceiling Limits
“View Frequencies?”
Field (display
Frequency Page)
Airspace Name
2.
Status and
Time to Entry
Turn the large right knob to highlight “View
Frequencies?” and press ENT.
4.
Press ENT to place the selected frequency in
the standby field of the COM window.
5.
Press the COM flip-flop key to activate the
selected frequency.
6.
To return to the Airspace Information Page, turn
the large right knob to highlight “Done?”
and press ENT (or press CLR).
7.
To return to the Nearest Airspace Page, turn
the large right knob to highlight “Done?”
and press ENT (or press CLR).
8.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
Highlight “View Frequencies?” and press ENT
to display the communication frequency(s)
for the controlling agency.
3.
Turn the large right knob to scroll through
the list, highlighting the desired frequency.
190-00357-00 Rev C
155
7 - NRST PAGES
Nearest Airspaces
The Airspace Information Page displays — and airspace alert messages are provided for — the following
airspace types:
The bottom right-hand corner of the Airspace
Information Page displays the floor and ceiling limits
of the airspace. The following are examples of what
may appear as vertical limits for an airspace:
Airspace alert for a military operations area
(MOA).
• Alert
• Caution
Airspace Information Page for the same
military operations area.
• Class B
• Class C
• 11000ft msl (11000 feet mean sea level)
• Class D
• CTA
• 500ft agl (500 feet above ground level)
• Danger
• MOA
• MSL (at mean sea level)
• Prohibited
• Restricted
• Notam (see Notice to Airmen)*
• TMA
• Training
• Unknown*
• Unlimited*
• TRSA
• Unspecified
• See Chart*
• Surface*
• Warning
* Not shown in this example
All airspace alert messages, except for prohibited
areas, may be turned on or off from the Airspace
Alarms Page. See Sec 9 - Aux - Setup 1 - CDI / Alarms
for more information. An altitude buffer is also provided on the Airspace Alarms Page to provide an extra
margin of safety above/below the published limits.
156
190-00357-00 Rev C
GNS 530W only
Section 8
VLOC (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope)
Receiver Operations
VLOC Tuning Window
The GNS 530W includes digitally-tuned VOR/
localizer and glideslope receivers with the desired
frequency selected on the VLOC window, along the
left-hand side of the display. Frequency selection
is performed by pressing the small left knob and
turning the small and large left knobs to select the
desired frequency.
VLOC frequencies are selected with the tuning
cursor in the standby VLOC frequency field, and using
the small and large left knobs to dial in the desired
frequency. The standby frequency always appears
below the active frequency. The active frequency is the
frequency currently in use.
Ident Audio and Volume
Standby
Frequency
8 - VLOC RECEIVER
Ident Audio and Volume / VLOC Tuning
VLOC ident is enabled
by pressing the VLOC
volume knob. When VLOC
ident is enabled, an “ID”
indication appears in the
upper right corner of the
VLOC window — to the
immediate right of “VLOC”.
VLOC audio volume is
adjusted using the VLOC
volume knob. Turn the
VLOC volume knob clockwise to increase volume,
or counterclockwise to
decrease volume.
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: The tuning cursor normally appears in the
COM window, unless placed in the VLOC window
by pressing the small left knob. When the tuning
cursor is in the VLOC window, it automatically
returns to the COM window after 30 seconds of
inactivity.
The active frequency in either window cannot be
accessed directly — only the standby frequency is
highlighted by the tuning cursor.
j
v
y
Push for ident audio. Turn to adjust
audio volume.
Push to toggle tuning cursor between
COM and VLOC windows. Turn to adjust the kHz value (the portion after
the decimal point) of the standby
VLOC frequency.
Turn to adjust the MHz value (the
portion before the decimal point) of
the standby VLOC frequency.
157
8 - VLOC RECEIVER
VLOC Ident Window
GNS 530W only
To select a VOR/localizer/ILS frequency:
VLOC Ident Window
1.
Directly below the VLOC Tuning
Window is a VLOC Ident Window
(default setting). When the GNS
530W is tuned to a nearby VOR, the
VLOC Ident Window displays the
Morse code identifier of the selected
station, the radial from the VOR and the distance from
the VOR. When tuned to a nearby localizer, the VLOC
Ident window displays the identifier, associated airport
and runway. The VLOC Ident Window can be replaced
with traffic information or configurable data fields.
If the tuning cursor is not currently in the VLOC
window, press the small left knob momentarily.
Auto-Tuning
Press the small left knob to move the tuning
cursor to the VLOC window. Turn the small
left knob to select the kilohertz portion of
the frequency and the large left knob to
select the megahertz portion.
158
2.
Turn the large left knob to select the desired
megahertz (MHz) value. For example, the
“117” portion of the frequency “117.80”.
3.
Turn the small left knob to select the desired
kilohertz (kHz) value. For example, the “.80”
portion of the frequency “117.80”.
4.
To make the standby frequency the active
frequency, press the VLOC flip-flop key.
A frequency may also be quickly selected from the
database by simply highlighting the desired frequency
on the Waypoint VOR Page or the Nearest VOR Page
and pressing ENT. Once a frequency is selected in
the standby field, it may be transferred to the active
frequency by pressing the VLOC flip-flop key. (Autotuning can also be performed from VLOC frequencies
listed on the NAVCOM, Airport Frequency, and Nearest Flight Service Station pages.)
190-00357-00 Rev C
VOR Page
Nearest VOR Page
GNS 530W only
8 - VLOC RECEIVER
Auto-tuning
To select a VLOC frequency from the Waypoint
VOR or Nearest VOR Pages:
To select an approach and automatically tune the
proper VLOC frequency:
1.
Select the desired page from the main pages.
(See the page references on the preceding
page.)
1.
Select the destination airport using the directto key or as the last waypoint in the active
flight plan.
2.
Press the small right knob momentarily to
activate the flashing cursor.
2.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
frequency for the desired VOR.
3.
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Select
Approach?” and press ENT.
4.
A window appears listing the available procedures. Turn the small right knob to highlight
the desired procedure and press ENT.
5.
A second window appears listing available transitions. Turn the small right knob to highlight the
desired transition waypoint and press ENT (the
approach “Vectors” option assumes that you will
receive vectors to the final course segment of the
approach and thus provides navigation guidance
to intercept this final course).
Turn the large right knob to highlight “Load?”
or “Activate?” and press ENT. (“Load?” adds
the procedure to the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This
allows you to continue navigating the original
flight plan, but keeps the procedure available
on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed.)
4.
Press ENT to place the frequency in the standby
field of the VLOC window.
5.
Press the VLOC flip-flop key to activate the
selected frequency.
6.
Press the small right knob to remove the
flashing cursor.
NOTE: For duplex COM operations, the VLOC receiver may be auto-tuned from the Nearest Flight
Service Station Page.
When selecting a VOR or ILS approach, manual
tuning of the VLOC receiver is not required. Once the
approach procedure is “Loaded” or “Activated”, the
GNS 530W automatically places the proper frequency
in the standby field of the VLOC window. If you wish
to use this frequency, simply press the VLOC flip-flop
key to activate the frequency. Additional information
on approach procedures is provided in Section 5.
6.
190-00357-00 Rev C
159
8 - VLOC RECEIVER
CDI Key
CDI Key
The GNS 530W’s CDI key is used to couple the
GPS or VLOC receiver to the external CDI (or HSI).
When the external CDI (or HSI) is connected to the
GPS receiver, “GPS” appears at the bottom left corner
of the page, directly above the CDI key. When the
external CDI (or HSI) is being driven by the VLOC
receiver, “VLOC” appears instead.
7.
8.
160
For VOR and ILS approaches, the standby field
of the VLOC window is automatically tuned to
the proper frequency. To activate the frequency
press the VLOC flip-flop key. To display VLOC
course information on the external CDI (or HSI)
press CDI and verify that “VLOC” is displayed
at the bottom left corner of the screen, directly
above the CDI key.
For non-GPS approaches (ILS and VOR), a
reminder window appears indicating that GPS
guidance on such approaches is strictly for
monitoring only — use the VLOC receivers and
external CDI (or HSI) for primary navigation. To
confirm this reminder, highlight “Yes?” and
press ENT.
To couple the external CDI (or HSI) to the GPS
receiver or VLOC receiver, press the CDI key to
display “GPS” or “VLOC”, as desired.
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: The external CDI (or HSI) must be coupled
to the VLOC receiver for approaches which are
not approved for GPS. See ILS example in the
Procedures section for more information.
NOTE: GPS level of service annunciations (LPV, ENR,
etc. as shown on page 83) are not applicable to the
external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
9 - AUX PAGES
AUX Page Group
AUX Page Group
Section 9
AUX Pages
To quickly select an AUX page:
Section 2 introduced the 500W-series unit main
page groups — NAV, WPT, AUX, NRST — and
described each page in the NAV group. The third
page group (AUX) allows you to change unit settings,
customizing operation to your preferences. The AUX
pages also provide E6B functions — such as trip planning, fuel planning, density altitude, true airspeed and
winds aloft calculations.
1.
From any page, press and hold CLR to select
the Default NAV Page. (You may skip this step
if you are already viewing any of the main
pages.)
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the AUX
page group. “AUX” appears in the lower right
corner of the screen.
3.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
AUX page.
NAV
WPT
AUX
NRST
5-7 available pages
(see Section 2)
10 available pages
(see Section 6)
4 available pages
(see below)
8 available pages
(see Section 7)
Flight Planning
Utility
190-00357-00 Rev C
Setup 1
Setup 2
161
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
Flight Planning Page
The Flight Planning Page provides access to E6B
functions for fuel planning, trip planning, density
altitude/true airspeed/winds aloft calculations, scheduled messages and a “Crossfill” function to transfer
flight plans/user waypoints to a second 500W-series
unit. When a flight planning item is selected, the corresponding page appears providing additional information and features.
...to display the corresponding option page
(e.g. Density Alt / TAS / Winds Page).
The following flight planning items are available:
To select, highlight
with cursor and
press ENT.
First Page
in AUX Group
To select an item from the Flight Planning Page:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired
item, and press ENT.
From the Flight Planning Page, highlight the
desired item and press ENT...
162
Fuel Planning — When equipped with fuel flow
(FF) and/or fuel on board (FOB) sensors, this item
displays current fuel conditions along the active
direct-to or flight plan. You may also manually
enter fuel flow, ground speed (GS) and (in some
instances) fuel on board figures for planning purposes. Fuel planning figures can be displayed not
only for the currently active flight plan or directto, but also point-to-point between two specified
waypoints and for any programmed flight plan.
Fuel planning figures can be entered and displayed
based upon one of three configurations:
• No Fuel Sensors Connected — In this instance
fuel on board and fuel flow are manually entered and used to recalculate fuel on board as
it is consumed. When fuel flow or fuel on board
is manually entered, the figures are retained
the next time you view the page (with fuel on
board continuously recalculated).
• Fuel Flow Sensor Installed, But No Fuel On
Board Sensor — Fuel on board is manually
entered. Fuel flow is automatically provided
by sensor. If fuel flow is manually entered (to
override the sensor), it does not affect the FOB
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
figure and is not retained the next time you
view the page.
• Fuel Flow and Fuel On Board Sensors Installed
— Fuel flow and fuel on board are automatically provided by sensors. Fuel on board can
NOT be entered manually. Fuel Flow can be
entered manually, but does not affect the FOB
figure and is not retained the next time you
view the page.
Trip Planning — allows you to view desired
track (DTK), distance (DIS), estimated time en
route (ETE), en route safe altitude (ESA) and
estimated time of arrival (ETA) information for a
direct-to, point-to-point between two specified
waypoints or for any programmed flight plan. This
item also displays the sunrise/sunset times for your
destination waypoint (for the selected departure
date).
Density Alt / TAS / Winds — indicates the
theoretical altitude at which your aircraft performs depending upon several variables, including
indicated altitude (IND ALT), barometric pressure
(BARO) and total air temperature (TAT; the temperature, including the heating effect of speed, read
on a standard outside temperature gauge). This
item computes true airspeed (TAS), based upon the
factors above and the calibrated airspeed (CAS).
Also, this menu option determines winds aloft
— the wind direction and speed — and a head
wind/tail wind component, based upon the calculated density altitude (DEN ALT), true airspeed,
aircraft heading (HDG) and ground speed.
Select the “Density Alt / TAS / Winds” option
to calculate density altitude, true airspeed
and winds aloft.
The Trip Planning Page calculates desired
track, distance, estimated time en route, en
route safe altitude and estimated time of
arrival for a specified direct-to, point-to-point
or flight plan.
NOTE: Point-to-point waypoints, flight plans and/
or ground speeds (default is current GPS-calculated ground speed) entered on the Fuel Planning
Page automatically transfer to the Trip Planning
Page, and vice versa.
Scheduler — displays reminder messages (such
as “Change oil”, “Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”,
etc.). One-time, periodic, and event-based messages are allowed. One-time messages appear
once the timer expires and reappear each time the
500W-series unit is powered on, until the message
is deleted. Periodic messages automatically reset to
the original timer value, once the message is displayed. Event-based messages do not use a timer,
but rather a specific date and time.
190-00357-00 Rev C
163
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
Crossfill — allows the pilot to transfer the active
flight plan, any stored flight plan, a user waypoint
or all user waypoints between two 500W-Series (or
400W-Series) Garmin units in a dual-unit installation.
To perform fuel planning operations:
1.
Select “Fuel Planning” from the Flight Planning
Page.
2.
The current fuel planning “leg mode” is
displayed at the top of the page: “POINT TO
POINT” or “FPL” (for a flight plan leg). To
change the leg mode, press MENU to display
an options window for the other leg mode, then
press ENT to accept the other leg mode.
For “flight plan leg” fuel planning, select “Flight Plan?” from
the options window. Use the small right knob to select the
desired flight plan and the desired leg of the flight plan.
3a. For direct-to planning, verify that the “from”
waypoint field indicates “P.POS” (present
position). If necessary, press CLR to display
“P.POS”. Press ENT and the flashing cursor
moves to the “to” waypoint field. Turn the
small and large right knobs to enter the
identifier of the “to” waypoint and press ENT
to accept the waypoint.
For direct-to fuel planning, press CLR (with the “from”
waypoint field highlighted) to display “P.POS” (which represents your present position).
3b. For point-to-point fuel planning, turn the small
and large right knobs to enter the identifier
of the “from” waypoint. Once the waypoint’s
identifier is entered, press ENT to accept the
waypoint. The flashing cursor moves to the
“to” waypoint. Again, turn the small and
large right knobs to enter the identifier of
the “to” waypoint and press ENT to accept
the waypoint.
OR,
3c. For “flight plan leg” fuel planning, turn the
small right knob to select the desired flight
plan (already stored in memory), by number.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“LEG” field and turn the small right knob to
select the desired leg of the flight plan, or select
“Cum” to apply fuel planning calculations to
the entire flight plan.
4.
If your fuel management system does not enter
the data automatically, turn the large right
knob to highlight the fuel on board (FOB)
field.
5.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the amount of fuel on board. Press ENT when
finished.
or,
164
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
6.
The flashing cursor moves to the fuel flow (FF)
field. Use the small and large right knobs
to enter the fuel flow rate. Press ENT when
finished. Note that if a fuel system is providing
current fuel flow, the fuel flow defaults to this
value.
7.
The flashing cursor moves to the ground speed
(GS) field. Use the small and large right
knobs to override the current ground speed
(and enter a planning figure). Press ENT when
finished. (To return ground speed reading to
current conditions, highlight the ground speed
[GS] field, press CLR, then press ENT.)
8.
With all variables entered, information such as
fuel required (REQ), range (RNG), and endurance (ENDUR) is provided. You can change the
information displayed on the page by pressing
MENU and selecting the “Change Fields?”
option. If your 500W-series unit installation
includes connection to fuel sensors, additional
information items are presented when the
“Change Fields?” option is selected.
To perform trip planning operations:
1.
Select “Trip Planning” from the Flight Planning
Page.
2.
The current trip planning “leg mode” is displayed at the top of the page: “POINT TO
POINT” or “FPL LEG” (for a flight plan leg). To
change the leg mode, press MENU to display
an options window for the other leg mode, then
press ENT to accept the other leg mode.
Press MENU and use the options window to
select the other leg mode: Point-to-Point or
Flight Plan.
3a. For direct-to planning, verify that the “from”
waypoint field indicates “P.POS” (present
position). If necessary, press CLR to display
“P.POS”. Press ENT and the flashing cursor
moves to the “to” waypoint field. Turn the
small and large right knobs to enter the
identifier of the “to” waypoint and press ENT
to accept the waypoint.
OR,
3b. For point-to-point trip planning, turn the small
and large right knobs to enter the identifier
of the “from” waypoint. Once the waypoint’s
identifier is entered, press ENT to accept the
waypoint. The flashing cursor moves to the
“to” waypoint. Again, turn the small and
large right knobs to enter the identifier of
the “to” waypoint and press ENT to accept
the waypoint.
OR,
3c. For “flight plan leg” trip planning, turn the
small right knob to select the desired flight
plan (already stored in memory), by number.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“LEG” field and turn the small right knob to
190-00357-00 Rev C
165
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
select the desired leg of the flight plan, or select
“Cum” to apply trip planning calculations to
the entire flight plan.
4.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
departure time (DEP TIME) field.
5.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the departure time. Press ENT when finished.
(Departure time may be entered in local or UTC
time, depending upon unit settings.
6.
If necessary, use the small and large right
knobs to enter the departure date. Press ENT
when finished.
8.
With all variables entered, the following information is provided:
• DTK — Desired track, or desired course
• DIS — Distance to waypoint
• ETE — Estimated time en route
• ESA — En route safe altitude
• ETA — Estimated time of arrival
• Sunrise/Sunset times at the destination
To calculate density altitude, true airspeed, winds
aloft:
1.
Select “Density Alt / TAS / Winds” from the
Flight Planning Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the indicated altitude (IND ALT) field. Use the small and large
right knobs to enter the altitude indicated on
your altimeter. Press ENT when finished.
The current time and date are automatically
offered for departure time and date. To accept either automatic selection, simply press
ENT when the selection is highlighted.
7.
166
The flashing cursor moves to the ground speed
(GS) field. Use the small and large right
knobs to override the current ground speed
(and enter a planning figure). Press ENT when
finished. (To return ground speed reading to
current conditions, highlight the ground speed
[GS] field, press CLR, then press ENT.)
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the indicated altitude.
3.
The flashing cursor moves to the calibrated
airspeed (CAS) field. Use the small and large
right knobs to enter the airspeed from your
airspeed indicator. Press ENT when finished.
4.
The flashing cursor moves to the barometric
pressure (BARO) field. Use the small and
large right knobs to enter the barometric
pressure (altimeter setting). Press ENT when
finished.
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
5.
The flashing cursor moves to the total air temperature (TAT) field. Use the small and large
right knobs to enter the temperature. Press
ENT when finished.
To enter a scheduled message:
1.
Select “Scheduler” from the Flight Planning
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the first message
field. If necessary, turn the large right knob
to highlight the first blank message field.
3.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the message text. Press ENT when finished.
(The 500W-series unit stores up to nine scheduled messages holding 20 characters each.)
4.
The flashing cursor moves to the type field
under the new message. Turn the small right
knob to display a window of available options:
Event, One Time or Periodic. Press ENT to select
the highlighted option.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the total air temperature (TAT). TAT is the
temperature, including the heating effect
of speed, read on an outside temperature
gauge.
6.
The flashing cursor moves to the aircraft heading (HDG) field. Use the small and large right
knobs to enter the aircraft heading from the
directional gyro or compass. Press ENT when
finished.
7.
With all variables entered, the following information is provided:
• DEN ALT — Density altitude
• TAS — True airspeed
• WIND — Wind direction and speed
• HEAD/TAIL WIND — Magnitude of head
wind or tail wind component
Turn the small right knob to select the
desired message type. One Time and Periodic
messages appear when the time expires.
Event-based messages expire at a specified
time and date.
5.
NOTE: If your installation includes components
(such as an air/data sensor) to provide any of
the variables above, the Density Alt / TAS / Winds
Page data defaults to the values provided by
these components.
190-00357-00 Rev C
The flashing cursor moves to the time (or date)
field. Use the small and large right knobs
to set the time (or date) required before the
message is displayed. Time is entered as hours/
minutes/seconds (hhh:mm:ss). Event-based
messages expire at a specified date and time.
Press ENT when finished entering time (or
date).
167
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
To select Crossfill
Select “Crossfill?” from the Default NAV Page
or Flight Plan Page by pressing MENU or while
on the Flight Planning Page by scrolling down to
“Crossfill” and pressing ENT.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the time or date.
To edit a scheduled message:
1.
Select “Scheduler” from the Flight Planning
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the first message
field.
3.
To edit the message text, turn the large right
knob to highlight the desired message field.
Use the small and large right knobs to edit
the message text — entering the new text
directly over the old message. Press ENT when
finished.
4.
To edit the time field, turn the large right
knob to highlight the field. Use the small and
large right knobs to edit the new date or time
— entering the new value directly over the old
figure. Press ENT when finished.
To delete a scheduled message:
1.
Select “Scheduler” from the Flight Planning
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the first message
field. Turn the large right knob to highlight
the desired message field.
3.
168
Press CLR to delete the message text, followed
by ENT to confirm the deletion.
You can select the “Crossfill?” option from
the Default NAV Page or the Flight Plan Catalog, as well as from the Flight Planning Page.
Crossfill method can be set to “Auto” or
“Manual”. “Auto” automatically transfers
direct-to or active flight plan selections
between units.
Automatic Operation: If both units are set to automatic, a change in the active flight plan on one unit
can also be seen in the other. Initiating a direct-to to
a waypoint on one unit also initiates a direct-to to the
same waypoint on the other unit.
If one unit is set for automatic crossfill and the other
is set for manual crossfill, then only the auto unit
automatically sends data to the manual unit. In this
configuration, the auto unit could be thought of as the
master unit.
Manual Operation: If manual operation is desired,
the pilot must invoke all transfers from that unit.
When a unit is configured for automatic transfer, a
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Flight Planning
manual transfer can also be done on command. If
either of the messages “data transfer error” or “data
transfer cancelled” are received during an automatic or
manual transfer, the pilot must force another transfer.
3.
The flashing cursor highlights the transfer data
option (TRANSFER) field. Turn the small right
knob to display a window of available data
options:
To transfer flight plans or user waypoints to/from a
second 500W-Series (or 400W-Series) unit:
1.
Select “Crossfill” from the Flight Planning
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the method field.
Turn the small right knob to select “Auto”
or “Manual”. “Auto” automatically transfers
any selection of (or any change to) a direct-to
destination or active flight plan to a second
500W/400W-Series Garmin unit.
Turn the small right knob to display a list
of TRANSFER options. Continue turning the
small right knob to select the desired option.
• Active Flight Plan — transfers the active
flight plan to/from a second 500W-Series
(or 400W-Series) Garmin unit in a dual unit
installation. This option is the default when
selecting “Crossfill” from the Flight Planning
Page. Active Flight Plan information is automatically transferred between units when the
“Auto” method is selected above.
• Flight Plan — transfers any stored flight plan
to/from a second 500W-Series (or 400WSeries) unit, by selecting the flight plan by
number. This option is the default when
selecting “Crossfill” from the Flight Plan Catalog.
• User Waypoints (all) — transfers all stored
user waypoints to/from a second 500W/400WSeries unit.
• User Waypoint — transfers the specified
user waypoint to a second 500W/400W-Series
unit.
From the METHOD field, turn the small right
knob to select “Auto” or “Manual”. “Auto”
automatically transfers direct-to or active
flight plan selections between units.
190-00357-00 Rev C
169
9 - AUX PAGES
Utility Page
4.
Continue turning the small right knob to
select the desired data option. Press ENT when
finished.
5a. For a stored flight plan (“Flight Plan” data
option), the flight plan number field is highlighted. Turn the small right knob to select
the desired flight plan and press ENT.
OR,
5b. For a specified user waypoint (“User Waypoint”
data option), the waypoint identifier field is
highlighted. Use the small and large right
knobs to enter the identifier of the desired user
waypoint. Press ENT when finished.
6.
The flashing cursor moves to the “CROSS-SIDE”
field. Turn the small right knob to select “To”
or “From” and press ENT.
7.
The flashing cursor moves to the “Initiate
Transfer?” confirmation field. Press ENT to
transfer the selected data.
Utility Page
The Utility Page provides access to checklists, a
count down/up timer, trip timers, trip statistics, RAIM
(Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) prediction and software/database version information. When
a utility item selected, the corresponding page appears
providing additional information and features.
To select, highlight
with cursor and
press ENT.
Second Page
in AUX Group
To select an item from the Utility Page:
1.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large or small right knob to select
the desired item, and press ENT.
From the Utility Page, highlight the desired
item and press ENT...
170
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Utility Page
...to display the corresponding option page
(e.g. Trip Statistics Page).
3.
Press the small right knob to return to the
previous item.
The following items are available:
Checklists — provides up to nine different user-defined checklists containing up to 30 items each.
Flight Timers — provides count up/down timers,
plus automatic recording of departure time and total
trip time. Departure and total trip time recording can
be configured to run either any time 500W-series unit
power is on, or only when your ground speed exceeds
30 knots.
Trip Statistics — provides readouts for trip odometers, average speed and maximum speed. These
readouts are resettable (individually or all at once) by
pressing MENU to display an options window.
RAIM Prediction — predicts if GPS coverage is
available for your current location or at a specified
waypoint at any time and date. Receiver Autonomous
Integrity Monitoring performs checks to ensure that
the 500W-series unit has adequate satellite geometry
during your flight. RAIM availability is near 100%
in Oceanic, En Route and Terminal phases of flight.
Because the FAA’s TSO requirements for non-precision
approaches specify significantly better satellite coverage than other flight phases, RAIM may not be available when flying some approaches. The 500W-series
unit automatically monitors RAIM during approach
operations and warns you if RAIM is not available.
In such cases, use the GNS 530W’s VLOC receiver
instead for the approaches. RAIM prediction helps you
plan for a pending flight to confirm GPS operation
during an approach.
RAIM prediction only predicts the availability of
Fault Detection (FD) integrity in the absence of WAAS
corrections. It cannot predict the availability of LPV
or L/VNAV approaches. The FAA provides a NOTAM
service for LPV approach availability.
An “INTEG” annunciation at the bottom left corner of the
screen indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient to pass
built-in receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM)
tests. When this occurs, the GPS receiver continues to provide
navigation information, but should not be used for primary
navigation guidance. Use the GNS 530W’s VLOC receiver or
another suitable navigation source.
190-00357-00 Rev C
171
9 - AUX PAGES
Utility Page
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
each checklist item followed each time by ENT.
(Each checklist may contain up to 30 line items
up to sixteen characters in length.)
Software Versions — provides software version
information for the operating software within the GPS
receiver, COM transceiver, VOR/localizer receiver,
glideslope receiver and main processor board.
4.
Database Versions — The Database Versions Page
displays the current Jeppesen database type, effective
date, and expiration date, along with the version and
type of built-in land database.
To execute a checklist:
Terrain Database Versions — The Terrain Database Versions Page displays the current terrain and
obstacle database types, version, cycle, effective date,
and expiration date.
1.
With the Checklists Page displayed, turn the
large right knob to select the desired checklist
and press ENT.
2.
As you complete each checklist item, press ENT
to move to the next item on the list.
To edit a checklist:
1.
With the Checklists Page displayed, turn the
large right knob to select the desired checklist
and press ENT.
2.
Press MENU to display an options menu.
Select “Edit Item?” and press ENT, then use
the small and large right knobs to edit each
checklist item. Press ENT when finished.
Checklists
To create a checklist:
1.
Select “Checklist” from the Utility Page. Press
ENT to display a list of checklists.
To insert a checklist step into an existing checklist:
Select “Create New Checklist?” to enter a new checklist into
memory. If the new checklist is similar to a checklist you’ve
already created, you may wish to use the “Copy Checklist?”
option and then edit the checklist copy.
172
2.
Press MENU to display an options menu. Turn
the large right knob to select “Create New
Checklist?” and press ENT.
3.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter
the name of a checklist. Press ENT when finished. (Up to nine different checklists can be
created and stored in the 500W-series unit.)
1.
With the Checklists Page displayed, turn the
large right knob to select the desired checklist
and press ENT.
2.
Turn the large right knobs to highlight the
existing checklist entry which immediately follows the new checklist step.
3.
Turn the small and large right knobs to
enter the new checklist step. Press ENT when
finished.
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Utility Page
To delete a checklist or all checklists:
Flight Timers
1.
To view, use or reset the generic timer:
2.
With the Checklists Page displayed, press
MENU to display an options menu.
Turn the large right knob to select “Delete
Checklist?” or “Delete All Checklists?” and
press ENT to remove the highlighted checklist
or all checklists from memory.
1.
Select “Flight Timers” from the Utility Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights “Start?”. To start
the generic timer, press ENT. (You typically
begin with this step for count up timers. However, for count down timers, you may wish to
enter a count direction and time before starting
the timer. See below.)
3.
To change the count direction, turn the large
right knob to highlight the count direction
field: “Down” or “Up”. Turn the small right
knob to select the desired count direction. Press
ENT when finished.
4.
For a count down timer, turn the large right
knob to highlight the time field. Use the small
and large right knobs to enter the count
down time — in hours, minutes and seconds.
Press ENT when finished.
5.
To stop the generic timer, turn the large right
knob to highlight “Stop?” and press ENT.
6.
To reset the generic timer, turn the large right
knob to highlight the time field. Press CLR,
followed by ENT.
To copy a checklist:
1.
With the Checklists Page displayed and the
desired checklist selected, press MENU to
display an options menu.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select “Copy
Checklist?” and press ENT to copy the checklist to an empty checklist memory location.
To sort the checklists by name or entry:
1.
With the Checklists Page displayed, press
MENU to display an options menu.
2.
Turn the large right knob to select “Sort List
By Entry?” or “Sort List By Name?” and press
ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
173
9 - AUX PAGES
Utility Page
To record or reset the departure time:
To view, use or reset total trip time:
1.
Select “Flight Timers” from the Utility Page.
1.
Select “Flight Timers” from the Utility Page.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
reset mode field, under “Departure Time”.
The reset mode field indicates “Pwr-on” or
“GS>30kt”.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
reset mode field, under “Total Trip Time”.
(The reset mode field indicates “Pwr-on” or
“GS>30kt”.)
3.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
reset mode. (“Pwr-on” records a departure
time when the 500W-series unit is turned on.
“GS>30kt” records a departure time once
the GPS-computed ground speed exceeds 30
knots.)
3.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
reset mode. (“Pwr-on” resets trip time to zero
hours/minutes/seconds each time the 500Wseries unit is turned on. “GS>30kt” resets trip
time to zero after power on and when the GPScomputed ground speed exceeds 30 knots.)
The 500W-series unit can be configured to
record the departure time when the unit
is powered on or when your ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
174
Turn the small right knob to select when the
trip timer resets: each time the 500W-series
unit is powered on or when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
4.
Press ENT when finished.
4.
Press ENT when finished.
5.
To reset the departure time, turn the large
right knob to highlight “Reset?” and press
ENT. This will reset the departure time to the
current time.
5.
To reset the total trip time, turn the large right
knob to highlight “Reset?” and press ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Utility Page
Trip Statistics
RAIM Prediction
To predict RAIM availability:
To reset trip statistics readouts:
1.
Select “Trip Statistics” from the Utility Page.
2.
Press MENU to display an options window
with several reset options:
1.
2.
3.
Press MENU to display an options window,
listing several reset options.
4.
• Reset Trip? — Resets trip odometer and average
ground speed readouts
• Reset Max Speed? — Resets maximum speed
readout only
Select “RAIM Prediction” from the utility
page.
The flashing cursor highlights the waypoint
field. Use the small and large right knobs
to enter the identifier of the waypoint at which
you wish to determine RAIM availability. Press
ENT when finished. (To determine RAIM availability for your present position, press CLR,
followed by ENT.)
The flashing cursor moves to the arrival date
field. Use the small and large right knobs to
enter the date for which you wish to determine
RAIM availability. Press ENT when finished.
The flashing cursor moves to the arrival time
field. Use the small and large right knobs
to enter the time you wish to use reference for
determine RAIM availability. Press ENT when
finished.
• Reset Odometer? — Resets odometer readout
only
• Reset All? — Resets all trip statistics readouts
3.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired
reset option and press ENT.
Once the destination, date and time are
entered, select “Compute RAIM?” to determine if satellite coverage is adequate for the
flight.
5.
190-00357-00 Rev C
The flashing cursor moves to “Compute
RAIM?”. Press ENT to begin RAIM prediction.
Once calculations are complete, the 500Wseries unit displays one of the following in the
RAIM status field:
175
9 - AUX PAGES
Utility Page
• RAIM Not Available —
Satellite coverage is predicted to NOT be
sufficient for reliable operation during nonprecision approaches
• RAIM Available —
Satellite coverage is predicted to be sufficient
for reliable operation during all flight phases,
including non-precision approaches
Database Versions
The Database Versions Page displays the current
Jeppesen database type, effective date, and expiration
date, along with the version and type of built-in land
database.
NOTE: RAIM computations predict satellite coverage
within ±15 minutes of the specified arrival date and
time. Refer to Section 11 for more information regarding RAIM protection limits.
Software Versions
The Software / Database Versions Page displays
software version information for the operating software within the GPS receiver, COM transceiver,
VOR/localizer receiver, glideslope receiver and main
processor board.
This page is for information purposes only — no
user functions are available from this page.
Database Versions
Terrain Database Versions
The Terrain Database Versions Page displays the
current terrain and obstacle database types, version,
cycle, effective date, and expiration date.
Software Versions
Terrain Database Versions
176
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
Setup 1 Page
2.
The Setup 1 Page provides access to airspace
alarms, CDI scale adjustments, an arrival alarm, units
of measure settings, position formats, map datums,
settings for local or UTC time display, display adjustments, nearest airport search parameters, data field
configurations and COM transceiver channel spacing.
When an item is selected, the corresponding page
appears providing access to the various unit settings.
...to display the corresponding page (e.g.
Units / Position Page).
To select, highlight
with cursor and
press ENT.
The following items are available:
Third Page
in AUX Group
To select an item from the Setup Page:
1.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired
item, and press ENT.
Press the small right knob momentarily, to
activate the flashing cursor.
From the Setup Page, highlight the desired
item and press ENT...
CDI / Alarms — allows you to define the scale for
the 500W-series unit on-screen course deviation
indicator. The scale values represent full scale
deflection for the CDI to either side. The default
setting is “Auto”. At this setting, the CDI scale is
set to 2.0 NM during the “en route” phase of flight.
Within 31 NM of your destination airport, the CDI
scale gradually ramps down to 1.0 NM (terminal area). Likewise, when leaving your departure
airport the CDI scale is set to 1.0 NM and gradually ramps up to 2 NM beyond 30 NM (from the
departure airport). During approach operations
the CDI scale gradually transitions down to an
angular CDI scale. At 2.0 NM of the final approach
fix (FAF), CDI scaling is tightened from 1.0 to the
angular full scale deflection (typically the angular
full-scale deflection is 2.0°, but will be as defined
for the approach).
190-00357-00 Rev C
177
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
automatic switching will not take place. See AUX
- Setup 1 for ILS CDI Selection details.
CDI scales and corresponding flight phases:
En Route
CDI / Alarms Page
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or
0.3 NM), the higher scale settings are not selected
during ANY phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 NM
is selected, the 500W-series unit uses this for en
route and terminal phases and ramps down further
during an approach. Note that the Horizontal
Alarm (HAL) protection limits listed below follow
the selected CDI scale, unless corresponding flight
phases call for lower HAL. For example, if the 1.0
NM CDI setting is selected, full-scale deflection
during approach will still follow the approach CDI
scale settings.
CDI Scale
Auto (oceanic)
±2.0 NM or Auto (en route)
±1.0 NM or Auto (terminal)
±0.3 NM or Auto
(approach)
Horizontal Alarm
Limit
2.0 NM
2.0 NM
1.0 NM
0.3 NM
An “auto” ILS CDI selection allows the 500Wseries unit to automatically switch the external CDI
from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver, when
intercepting the final approach course. Or, select
“manual” to manually switch the external CDI
connection, as needed (using the CDI key). If the
unit is installed with a KAP140/KFC225 autopilot,
178
Terminal
Approach
(for each scale/phase to be available,
“Selected CDI” must be set to “Auto”)
An arrival alarm, provided on the CDI / Alarms
Page, may be set to notify you with a message when
you have reached a user-defined distance to the
final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last
waypoint in a flight plan). Once you have reached
the set distance (up to 99.9 units), an “Arrival at
[waypoint]” message is displayed.
The Airspace Alarms fields allow you to turn the
controlled / special-use airspace message alerts on
or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the
Nearest Airspace Page or the airspace boundaries
depicted on the Map Page. It simply turns on/off
the warning provided when you are approaching or
near an airspace.
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands”
the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and you are
more than 500 feet above or below an airspace, you
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
will not be notified with an alert message; if you are
less than 500 feet above or below an airspace and
projected to enter it, you will be notified with an
alert message. The default setting is 200 feet.
Units / Position — allows you to configure the
displayed data to standard or metric units of measure. This setting applies to distance, speed, altitude, fuel, pressure and temperature. Also provided
are two magnetic variation (heading) options: Auto
or True. If “Auto” is selected, all track, course and
heading information is corrected to the magnetic
variation computed by the GPS receiver. The “True”
setting references all information to true north.
simply designate the offset by adding or subtracting
the correct number of hours.
Not all time zones are offset from UTC by a whole
number of hours (e.g., Newfoundland, Central
Australia, India, Iraq, ...)
The Date / Time Page allows you to display
time information (such as ETA) in UTC (zulu)
or local time.
Display Backlight — allows you to adjust the
display for optimum viewing in any condition.
Automatic backlighting is available which uses a
built-in photocell (at the top right corner of the display bezel) to make the proper display adjustments
without any user intervention. You may select
manual control of the display backlighting to tailor
the 500W-series unit display to your needs.
Use the Units / Position Page to switch
distance and speed measurements between
Nautical, Statute and Metric units.
Configuration settings for position format and map
datum are also provided. Position formats include
latitude/longitude, MGRS and UTM/UPS. The
NavData® card uses the WGS 84 map datum to
conform to WAAS requirements.
Date / Time — provides settings for time format
(local or UTC; 12- or 24-hour) and time offset. The
time offset is used to define current local time. UTC
(also called “GMT” or “zulu”) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites’ signals and
cannot be changed. If you prefer to use local time,
NOTE: Display backlighting changes are not
saved when the 500W-series unit is turned off.
Backlighting reverts to the “Auto” setting the
next time the unit is turned on.
Nearest Airport Criteria — defines the minimum runway length and surface type used when
determining the 25 nearest airports to display on
the Nearest Airport Page. A minimum runway
length and/or surface type may be entered to
prevent airports with small runways, or runways
that are not of appropriate surface, from being dis-
190-00357-00 Rev C
179
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
played. The default settings are “0 feet (or meters)”
for runway length and “any” for runway surface
type.
Data Field Configuration — determines the
information type that is displayed in the userselectable data field directly below the VLOC
window. Available data options are: VOR/LOC data
that displays VOR/Localizer information, Config
Data Fields that allow selection of a nav data item,
or a traffic watch screen (when connected to a
traffic sensor). The selected data option appears on
EVERY page.
6.
Turn the small or large right knob to highlight the desired item and then press ENT.
7.
Press the small right (CRSR) knob twice to
exit the selection process.
COM Configuration — allows you to select
8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz COM frequency channel
spacing.
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel
spacing is not approved for use in the United States.
Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in
the United States.
CDI / Alarms
To set the airspace warning messages or change
the altitude buffer:
1.
Select “CDI / Alarms” from the Setup 1 Page.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“On”/”Off” field next to the desired airspace
type. (“MOAs & Other Airspace” includes military operation, alert, caution, danger, training
and warning areas.)
To change the data field configuration:
180
1.
Select “Data Field Configuration” from the
Setup 1 Page.
2.
Turn the small right knob to display the
configuration items.
3.
Turn the small or large right knob to highlight the desired item and then press ENT.
4.
If you selected “Config Data Fields”, turn the
large right knob counter-clockwise to highlight the data field name.
5.
The data field name will be highlighted. Turn
the small right knob to display the data field
items.
Turn the large right knob to select the desired airspace type, then turn the small right
knob to select “On” or “Off”.
3.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Turn the small right knob to select “On” or
“Off”, as desired. Press ENT to accept the
selection.
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
To change the altitude buffer, turn the large
right knob to highlight the “Altitude Buffer”
field. Use the small and large right knobs
to enter the desired buffer distance. Press ENT
when finished.
4.
NOTE: The CDI scale is always displayed in nautical
miles, regardless of the current distance units of measure selected on the Units / Position Page.
To change the ILS CDI selection:
This buffer distance is added to the floor/
ceiling limits and provides an added margin
of safety.
NOTE: When an approach has been loaded into
the active flight plan, airspace alert messages are
disabled within 31 NM of the destination airport.
1.
Select “CDI / Alarms” from the Setup Page.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“ILS CDI Capture” field.
3.
Turn the small right knob to select “Auto” or
“Manual”, as desired. Press ENT to accept the
selection.
To change the maximum CDI scale setting:
1.
2.
3.
Select “CDI / Alarms” from the Setup Page.
The flashing cursor highlights the “Selected
CDI” field. Turn the small right knob to select
the desired CDI scale. The selected scale and
any lower scale settings are used during the
various phases of flight as described in Section
11 FDE - CDI/Alarms.
Press ENT to accept the selected scale. The
“System CDI” field displays the CDI scale currently in use. The “System CDI” setting may
differ from the “Selected CDI” depending upon
the current phase of flight.
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: Installations with certain autopilots, such as the
KAP 140 and KFC225, do not allow automatic ILS CDI
switching.
“Auto” ILS CDI Capture switches the CDI
output from GPS to the VLOC receiver as you
intercept the final approach course.
181
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
To set the arrival alarm and alarm distance:
To change the units of measure:
1.
Select “CDI / Alarms” from the Setup Page.
1.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“On”/”Off” field (left-hand side of the field
directly below “Arrival Alarm”).
Select “Units / Position” from the Setup
Page.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
desired units of measure category. The following categories, and corresponding units of
measure, are available:
3.
Turn the small right knob to select “On” or
“Off”, as desired. Press ENT to accept the
selection.
4.
The flashing cursor moves to the alarm distance field (to the immediate right of “On” or
“Off”). To enter an arrival alarm distance, use
the small and large right knobs to enter
the desired alarm distance. Press ENT when
finished.
Units / Position
To set the magnetic variation:
182
1.
Select “Units / Position” from the Setup
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the heading
mode field. Turn the small right knob to
select the desired heading mode: Auto or
True. Press ENT to accept the selection. (The
heading modes are described previously in the
Units/Position section.)
• DIS, SPD — distance and speed in Nautical
(nautical miles/knots), Statute (miles/miles
per hour) or Metric (kilometers/kilometers per
hour) terms.
• ALT, VS — altitude and vertical speed in Feet/
feet per minute, Meters/meters per minute, or
Meters/meters per second.
• PRESSURE — barometric pressure in Inches
or Millibars.
• TEMP — temperature in degrees Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
• FUEL — fuel units in Gallons, Imperial Gallons, Kilograms, Liters or Pounds.
3. Turn the small right knob to select the desired
units of measure for the selected category.
Press ENT to accept the selection.
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
Date / Time
To change the position format:
1.
Select “Units / Position” from the Setup
Page.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
“Position Format” field.
3.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
position format. The following position formats
are available:
• hdd°mm.mmm — latitude and longitude in
degrees and decimal minutes
• hdd°mm’ss.s” — latitude and longitude in
degrees, minutes and decimal seconds
• MGRS — Military Grid Reference System
• UTM/UPS — Universal Transverse Mercator /
Universal Polar Stereographic grids
4. Press ENT to accept the selected format.
To display local time or UTC:
1.
Select “Date / Time” from the Setup Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the “Time
Format” field. Turn the small right knob to
display a window of available time formats:
Local 12hr, Local 24hr, or UTC.
3.
Continue turning the small right knob to
select the desired time format.
4.
Press ENT to accept the selection.
To set the local time:
1.
Select “Date / Time” from the Setup Page.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
time offset field.
3.
Use the small and large right knobs to enter the
desired offset, beginning by entering a minus (-) or
plus (+) sign to indicate whether the offset is
behind UTC or ahead of UTC. (In the United
States, all local time offsets are minus, or
behind UTC.)
Map Datum:
The Map Datum may not be changed.
NOTE: Per TSO C146a, the WGS-84 map datum is used.
190-00357-00 Rev C
183
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
Nearest Airport Criteria
To set the minimum runway length and runway
surface:
1.
Select “Nearest Airport Criteria” from the Setup
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the “Runway
Surface” field. Turn the small right knob
to select the desired surface. The following
options are available:
Press ENT to accept the selected offset.
4.
• Any surface
NOTE: When a local time offset is entered, you
must also select “Local 12 hour” or “Local 24
hour” time format. The “UTC” time format setting
ignores any time offset entry.
• Hard surfaces Only
• Hard / Soft surfaces
• Water landings only
Display Backlight.
To change the backlighting intensity:
1.
Select “Display Backlight” from the Setup
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the backlight
“Mode” field. Turn the small right knob to
select the desired mode: Auto or Manual. Press
ENT to accept the selection.
3.
184
3.
Press ENT to accept the runway surface selection.
4.
The flashing cursor moves to the minimum
runway length field. To enter a different minimum runway length, use the small and large
right knobs to enter the desired length. Press
ENT when finished.
If “Manual” is selected, the flashing cursor
moves to the backlight “Level” field. Turn the
small right knob to select the desired level.
Press ENT to accept the selection.
190-00357-00 Rev C
A runway length of “0”(or a very short length)
will report all available runways.
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
NOTE: Exercise caution when changing the Nearest Airport Criteria. Remember, by excluding certain
surface types or shorter runway lengths, you may be
excluding airports from the nearest list that are more
than adequate for an emergency landing!
Data Field Configuration
To change the configuration of the data field
below the VLOC window:
3.
1.
Select “Data Field Configuration” from the
Setup Page.
2.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
data field option. The following options are
available:
4.
display traffic information. This allows you
to monitor traffic conditions from ANY page
and quickly identify traffic hazards. See the
400W/500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot's
Guide Addendum for more information on
traffic data.
Press ENT to accept the selection.
If “Configurable Data Fields” is selected, a
second selection field appears to allow you
to select the desired data type. Turn the large
right knob to highlight this second field, then
turn the small right knob to display a list
of available navigation data types. Continue
turning the small right knob to select the
desired data type and press ENT to approve
your selection.
• VOR/LOC Data — displays the identifier,
distance and radial FROM the tuned VOR station active in the VLOC window. When tuned
to a nearby localizer, the localizer identifier,
associated airport and runway are displayed
instead.
• Configurable Data Fields — displays a userselectable data field of navigation data (e.g.,
ground speed, track, distance to destination, etc.)
• Traffic Watch — if your 500W-series unit is
connected to other equipment providing traffic alert information (e.g., L3 SKYWATCH™
or RYAN TCAD), a window is provided to
190-00357-00 Rev C
185
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 1 Page
COM Configuration
3.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
frequency.
4.
Turn the large right knob to highlight the
right (decimal) part of the frequency field.
5.
Turn the small right knob to select the desired
frequency.
6.
Repeat for the desired frequencies. Press the
small right knob to finish.
To set the COM channel spacing:
1.
Select “COM Configuration” from the Setup 1
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor highlights the channel spacing field. Turn the small right knob to select
the desired channel spacing: 8.33 kHz or 25.0
kHz. Press ENT when finished.
8.33 kHz and 25.0 kHz channel spacing are
available for the GNS 530W’s COM transceiver. Use the 25.0 kHz setting in the United
States.
Preset Com Frequencies
On units configured for COM Frequency Presets
you may store up to 15 preset Com frequencies in the
Com Configuration page. On units configured with a
remote Com frequency recall switch, these preset frequencies can be loaded into the STBY frequency with
the press of a button.
When the remote Com frequency recall switch is
pressed, the next preset frequency will be moved into the
Com Standby frequency box and a small window with the
current Com Frequency Preset number will appear next
to it. You can scroll down through the preset frequencies
by repeatedly pressing the remote Com Frequency recall
switch. Empty Preset slots are skipped.
NOTE: Preset Com Frequencies are only available with
Main System Software Version 3.00, or later.
To store a preset Com frequency:
186
1.
Select “COM Configuration” from the Setup 2
Page.
2.
The flashing cursor will highlight the Channel
Spacing field. Turn the large right knob to
highlight the left (non-decimal) part of the first
frequency field.
190-00357-00 Rev C
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 2 Page
Restoring Factory Settings
Setup 2 Page
When making changes to any Setup 1 Page item,
a “Restore Defaults?” menu selection allows you to
restore the original factory settings (for the selected
option only). For example, with the CDI / Alarms Page
displayed, the “Restore Defaults?” option restores the
arrival alarm, all airspace alarms and CDI settings to
the original factory values.
SBAS Selection
To restore a Setup 1 Page item to the original factory settings:
1.
Select the desired item from the Setup 1
Page.
2.
Press MENU to display a page options
window.
3.
With “Restore Defaults?” highlighted, press
ENT.
To enable WAAS operation, in the Setup 2 page
select the SBAS (Space-Based Augmentation System)
item and then select WAAS. If WAAS is disabled,
the unit will not be able to fly vertically guided GPS
approaches (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V).
If WAAS was previously disabled, it may take several minutes to achieve a 3D-Diff fix after re-enabling
WAAS.
1.
Select “SBAS Selection” from the Setup 2 Page
and press ENT.
To enable WAAS operation, select the “SBAS
Selection” menu option.
2.
190-00357-00 Rev C
The flashing cursor highlights the WAAS status
selection. Turn the small right knob to allow
On/Off selection.
187
9 - AUX PAGES
Setup 2 Page
To enable WAAS operation, select the “SBAS
Selection” menu option.
3.
188
Turn the small right knob to select “On” or
“Off” and then press ENT. Press the Cursor
knob to exit WAAS selection.
190-00357-00 Rev C
10 - VNAV
Vertical Navigation Page
Section 10
Vertical Navigation (VNAV)
The 500W-series Vertical Navigation Page allows
you to create a three-dimensional profile which guides
you from your present position and altitude to a final
(target) altitude at a specified location. This is helpful
when you’d like to descend to a certain altitude near
an airport. Once the profile is defined, message alerts
and additional data on the Default NAV and Map
Pages keep you informed of your progress.
A message alert lets you know when to
begin a VNAV descent...
To display the Vertical Navigation Page, press the
VNAV key.
Target Altitude
Altitude Reference
(AGL or MSL)
Target Distance
(from reference)
Target Reference
Vertical Speed Desired
Vertical Speed Required
NOTE: To use the vertical navigation features,
your ground speed must be greater than 35 knots
and you must be navigating to a direct-to destination or using a flight plan, and not be in SUSP
mode.
...as well as when you’re approaching your
new target altitude.
190-00357-00 Rev C
189
10 - VNAV
Vertical Navigation Profile
To create a vertical navigation profile:
1.
Press VNAV to display the Vertical Navigation
Page.
2.
Press the small right knob to activate the
cursor.
3.
With the “Target Altitude” field highlighted,
turn the small and large right knobs to select
the target altitude and press ENT.
6.
Turn the small right knob to select “Before”
or “After”, and press ENT. This setting designates whether the offset distance defines a
point before you reach the target reference
waypoint or after you reach the waypoint. The
“After” selection is not available for the last
waypoint.
Turn the small and large right knobs to select
a target altitude. The target altitude can be
above field elevation (for an airport) or you
can specify an MSL altitude for any waypoint
category.
4.
5.
190
Turn the small right knob to select “Above
Wpt” (AGL) or “MSL”, and press ENT. “Above
Wpt” uses the altitude of a destination airport
as stored on the Jeppesen NavData card.
“MSL” lets you set a specific target altitude
for any waypoint category: airport, VOR, NDB,
intersection or user waypoint.
Turn the small and large right knobs to select
a distance from the target reference waypoint
and press ENT. If the target altitude should
occur at the target reference waypoint, enter
a distance of zero.
Turn the small right knob to select whether
the distance is “Before” or “After” the reference waypoint.
7.
190-00357-00 Rev C
When using a flight plan, the target reference waypoint itself can be specified from
the waypoints contained in the flight plan. By
default, the last waypoint in the flight plan is
selected. To select a different waypoint, turn
the small right knob to select the desired
waypoint and press ENT.
10 - VNAV
VNAV Messages
8.
The default profile utilizes a 400 foot-perminute descent rate. To change the rate, turn
the large right knob to highlight the “VS
Profile” field and use the small and large
right knobs to enter a new rate. Press ENT
when finished.
• At 500 feet above the target altitude, an
“Approaching Target Altitude” message is provided. The VSR readout on the Default NAV and
Map Pages is blanked out, at this point.
Vertical navigation messages can be turned on or
off. (By default the messages are off.) Turning the messages off allows you to keep the profile settings you’ve
entered previously, without having them generate messages when the feature isn’t needed.
To disable/enable the vertical navigation (VNAV)
messages:
The default profile is a 400 foot-per-minute
descent. Use the small and large right knobs
to enter a different vertical speed figure.
With the profile set, the vertical speed required
(VSR) is displayed on the Vertical Navigation Page.
Expect the following to occur when using the vertical
navigation feature:
• At one minute prior to reaching the initial
descent point, a message “Approaching VNAV
Profile” occurs. The descent angle also locks
to prevent changes in speed from altering the
profile.
• If selected, the vertical speed required (VSR)
readout on the default NAV and map pages
shows the desired vertical speed to maintain the
proper descent angle.
• Course reversals are not included in the VNAV
calculations until the aircraft begins the course
reversal. While reversing course, VNAV includes
direct-to the course reversal wayopint in the
VNAV calculation.
1.
Press MENU to display the Vertical Navigation
Page Options menu.
2.
With “VNAV Messages On?” highlighted, press
ENT. Or, if the messages are already on and
you wish to turn them off, make sure “VNAV
Messages Off?” is highlighted and press
ENT.
Select “VNAV Messages On?” to display the
vertical navigation alert message.
To restore the factory default VNAV settings:
1.
Press MENU to display the Vertical Navigation
Page Options menu.
2.
Turn the large right knob to highlight
“Restore Defaults?” and press ENT.
190-00357-00 Rev C
191
11 - FDE
Section 11
Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE)
Interface
Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE)
The Garmin 500W-series software incorporates
a Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) algorithm,
thus providing a basis for approval per FAA Notice
N8110.60 requirements for “GPS as a Primary Means
of Navigation for Oceanic/Remote Operations”.
The FDE consists of two distinct features, fault
detection and fault exclusion. The fault detection
feature detects the presence of an unacceptably large
pseudorange error for a satellite (and presumably,
position error) for a given mode of flight. Upon detection, fault exclusion follows and excludes the source
of the unacceptably large pseudorange error , thereby
allowing navigation to return to normal performance
without an interruption in service. To enhance safety,
FDE functionality is provided for other phases of flight
(non-precision approach, terminal, en route). The FDE
functionality for non-oceanic flight phases complies
with missed alert probability, false alert probability and
failed exclusion probability specified by DO-229C /
TSO-C146a.
192
Pre-departure Verification of FDE
An FDE prediction must be performed prior to
departure for a flight plan involving Oceanic/Remote
operation where GPS is to be the sole source of
navigation. Prior to departure, the operator must
use the FDE prediction program supplied with the
400W/500W-series Trainer CD to demonstrate that
there are no outages in the capability to navigate
on the specified route of flight (the FDE prediction
program determines whether the GPS constellation is
robust enough to provide a navigation solution for the
specified route of flight). Please, refer to the instructions included in the Garmin 400W/500W-series
Training CD for complete details on using the FDE
prediction program.
190-00357-00 Rev C
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Section 12
Messages, Abbreviations,
& Nav Terms
Messages
The 500W-series unit uses a flashing “MSG” annunciator at the bottom of the screen (directly above the MSG
key) to alert you of any important information or warnings.
While most messages are advisory in nature, warning messages may require your intervention. Whenever the “MSG”
annunciator flashes, press the MSG key to display the
message, when pilot workload allows. Press MSG again to
return to the previous page.
The following is a list of available messages and their meanings:
Abort Approach — Loss of Navigation — Execute
missed approach using other navigation equipment.
Airport terrain database integrity error — The 500Wseries unit has detected a problem with a database on the
TAWS/Terrain data card. The message “<database name>
database integrity error” indicates the data base in error.
The data is not usable and the card should be returned to
your Garmin dealer.
Airspace ahead — less than 10 minutes — Your GPScalculated course is projected to enter a special use airspace
within 10 minutes. This message is automatically disabled
within 30 nautical miles of an arrival airport, when an
approach is loaded.
Airspace near and ahead — Your GPS-calculated position is within 2 nautical miles of the boundary of a special
use airspace and your course is projected to enter the
airspace within 10 minutes. This message is automatically
disabled within 30 nautical miles of an arrival airport, when
an approach is loaded.
All data referenced to True North — the unit’s Heading
mode has been set to “True” in the AUX Setup pages.
Approach downgraded — Use LNAV minima — This
message will occur 60 seconds prior to the FAF if flying
LNAV+V, L/VNAV, or LPV approaches and WAAS integrity
parameters have fallen below minimal limits. As a result,
vertical guidance has been discontinued and the LPV,
LNAV+V, or L/VNAV approach you were flying has been
downgraded.
Approach is not active — The approach could not transition to “active”, at 2 nautical miles or closer to the FAF.
Verify that “SUSP” DOES NOT appear directly above the
OBS key, indicating the auto waypoint sequencing is suspended. This message also appears if Receiver Autonomous
Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) has determined that sufficient
GPS satellite coverage DOES NOT exist for the phase of
flight you are currently in (along with a “RAIM not available
from FAF to MAP” message).
Approaching target altitude — The current GPS-computed altitude is within 500 feet of the final Vertical Navigation target altitude.
Approaching VNAV profile — You are within one minute
of reaching the initial Vertical Navigation descent point.
APR Guidance Available - Use PROC before A/P APR
— For units configured with the KAP140 or KFC225
autopilot, this message reminds pilots, when they turn
on course to the FAF, that they need to enable autopilot
outputs (by pressing PROC and selecting “Enable A/P APR
Outputs?”) before switching the autopilot control panel to
APR.
Arrival at waypoint [waypoint name] — You are within
the arrival alarm circle for the indicated waypoint. The size
of the arrival alarm circle is defined from the “CDI / alarms”
menu option on the Setup Page.
Audio database integrity error — The 500W-series unit
has detected a problem with the built-in TAWS Audio Database. TAWS audio alerts are not available. The unit should
be returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
190-00357-00 Rev C
193
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Aviation database integrity error — The 500W-series
unit has detected a problem with a database on the
NavData® card. The message “<database name> database
integrity error” indicates the data base in error. The data is
not usable and the card should be returned to Jeppesen or
your Garmin dealer for service.
Bad geometry, parallel offset not activated — parallel
offset is not activated because of flight plan geometry.
Basemap database integrity error — The 500W-series
unit has detected a failure in the built-in basemap (land
data) database. Land data does not appear on the Map Page.
Other unit functions continue to work normally, however
the 500W-series unit should be taken to your Garmin
dealer for service at your earliest convenience.
Boot block verify failed - Return unit for repair
— System integrity testing has determined that the boot
block has become corrupted. Return the unit to your
Garmin dealer for service.
Cannot navigate locked FPL — You have attempted
to navigate a flight plan (FPL) with one or more locked
waypoints. A waypoint can be “locked” when the NavData®
card is replaced and the waypoint(s) does not exist in the
new database.
Can’t change an active waypoint — An attempt has
been made to modify the position of the active “to” or
“from” waypoint. The 500W-series unit does not allow
modifications to user waypoints currently being utilized for
navigation guidance.
Can’t delete an active or FPL waypoint — An attempt
has been made to delete the active “to” or “from” waypoint.
The 500W-series unit does not allow you to delete user
waypoints currently being utilized for navigation guidance.
CDI key stuck — The CDI key is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. Try pressing the CDI key again to cycle
its operation. If the message persists, contact your Garmin
dealer for assistance.
194
CDI key disabled — The installation has disabled the
CDI key so that systems (such as an EFIS) connected to the
500W series unit will always have GPS deviation data on
one output (main) and VLOC deviation data on the other
output (Nav). See your installer for more information.
Check unit cooling — The 500W-series unit has detected
excessive display backlighting temperature. The backlighting has been automatically dimmed to reduce the temperature. Check for adequate ventilation or check cooling
airflow. Contact your Garmin dealer for assistance.
COM has failed — (GNS 530W only) The unit has
detected a failure in its communications transceiver. The
COM transceiver is not available and the unit should be
returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
COM is not responding — (GNS 530W only) Internal
system-to-system communication between the main processor and the COM transceiver has failed. Operational status
of the COM transceiver is unknown and the unit should be
returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
If the Com board is still working, it will automatically
tune to 121.500 MHz. Transmit and receive functions
may still operate regardless of the displayed frequency.
COM needs service — (GNS 530W only) The unit has
detected a failure in its communications transceiver. The
COM transceiver may still be usable, but the unit should
be returned (at your earliest convenience) to your Garmin
dealer for service.
COM push-to-talk key stuck — (GNS 530W only) The
external push-to-talk (PTT) switch is stuck in the enabled
(or “pressed”) state. Try pressing the PTT switch again to
cycle its operation. If the message persists, contact your
Garmin dealer for assistance.
COM remote transfer key is stuck — (GNS 530W only)
The remote COM transfer switch is stuck in the enabled
(or “pressed”) state. Try pressing the switch again to cycle
its operation. If the message persists, contact your Garmin
dealer for assistance.
190-00357-00 Rev C
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
COM transfer key stuck — (GNS 530W only) The
COM flip-flop key is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Try pressing the COM flip-flop key again to cycle
its operation. If the message persists, contact your Garmin
dealer for assistance.
COM transmitter power has been reduced — (GNS
530W only) The unit has detected excessive unit temperature and/or an insufficient voltage level. The COM transceiver transmit power has been automatically reduced to
compensate for the condition. For excessive temperatures,
check for adequate ventilation or check cooling air flow.
If the message persists, contact your Garmin dealer for
assistance.
Configuration error - Config service req’d — The configuration information provided by the installer has been
lost or corrupted. Contact your Garmin dealer for service.
Data transfer cancelled (crossfill is busy) — An
attempt to transfer flight plan data during a unit-to-unit
crossfill was cancelled. The host unit is busy. Wait until
any previous crossfill operation is complete, before reattempting the transfer.
Data transfer cancelled (data invalid) — An attempt
to transfer a single user waypoint during a unit-to-unit
crossfill was cancelled. No waypoint was specified on the
Crossfill Page. Select a user waypoint and re-attempt the
transfer.
Data transfer cancelled (version mismatch) — An attempt
to transfer data during a unit-to-unit crossfill was cancelled.
The database versions of the two 500W-series unit are not
identical. If necessary, update the database(s) so they match.
Contact Jeppesen or your Garmin dealer for assistance.
Data transfer error, please re-transmit — An error was
detected during unit-to-unit crossfill of user data (user
waypoints and/or flight plans). The data transfer should be
re-attempted.
Database changed, validate user modified procedures
— You have modified one or more approaches, departures
or arrivals from their original published form. When the
NavData® card is replaced (database update), you must
manually verify your changes in the new database. This
message occurs each time a flight plan containing a modified procedure (generated from a prior database version) is
activated. To eliminate the message, re-create the flight plan
from the new database, then make the desired modifications.
Display backlight failure — The 500W-series unit has
detected a failure in the display backlighting. The unit
should be taken to your Garmin dealer for service.
Do not use for navigation — The 500W-series unit is in
Demo Mode and must not be used for actual navigation.
FPL has been truncated — The flight plan (FPL) was
truncated because not enough room existed to insert an
approach, departure or arrival. This may occur upon
power up when a database change increases the number of
waypoints within an instrument procedure.
FPL is full — remove unnecessary waypoints — An
attempt has been made to add more than 31 waypoints to
a flight plan (FPL). The 500W-series unit does not allow
more than 31 waypoints per flight plan.
FPL waypoint is locked — At least one flight plan (FPL)
waypoint is locked because the waypoint has been removed
from the current NavData® card (database change), the data
card is missing, or the data card has failed.
FPL waypoint moved — The position data for one or
more flight plan (FPL) waypoints moved at least 0.33 arc
minutes in the current NavData® card (database change).
G/S has failed — (GNS 530W only) The unit has detected
a failure in its glideslope receiver. The glideslope receiver
is not available and the unit should be returned to your
Garmin dealer for service.
Data transfer is complete — The unit-to-unit crossfill of
all user waypoint data has finished.
190-00357-00 Rev C
195
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
G/S is not responding — (GNS 530W only) Internal
system-to-system communication between the main processor and the glideslope receiver has failed. Operational status
of the glideslope receiver is unknown and the unit should
be returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
G/S needs service — (GNS 530W only) The unit has
detected a failure in its glideslope receiver. The glideslope
receiver may still be usable, but the unit should be returned
(at your earliest convenience) to your Garmin dealer for
service.
GAD configuration required — The GAD 42 Interface
Adapter has lost the configuration information stored in its
internal memory. Any mechanical indicators connected to
your 500W-series unit are unusable and the GAD 42 should
be returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
GAD needs service — The 500W-series unit has detected a
failure in the GAD 42 interface adapter. Any mechanical indicators connected to your unit are unusable and the GAD 42
should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
GDL 69 is not responding — No data is being received
from the GDL 69. If the problem persists, contact your
Garmin dealer for service.
GPS is not responding — Internal system-to-system
communication between the main processor and the GPS
receiver has failed. Operational status of the GPS receiver is
unknown and the unit should be returned to your Garmin
dealer for service.
GPS needs service — The 500W-series unit has detected
a failure in its GPS receiver. The GPS receiver may still be
usable, but the unit should be returned (at your earliest
convenience) to your Garmin dealer for service.
Inside airspace — Your GPS-calculated position lies
within the boundaries of a special use airspace. This message is automatically disabled within 30 nautical miles of an
arrival airport, when an approach is loaded.
196
Invalid closest pt of FPL — A closest point cannot be
created from the waypoint entered on the “Closest point
of flight plan” window. This occurs when the selected
waypoint is beyond the limits of all legs in the flight plan,
too far away, or when a unique waypoint name for the closest point cannot be created.
Invalid FPL modification — An attempt was made to
modify the final course segment (FAF to MAP) of an instrument approach. The 500W-series unit does not allow the
modifications.
Invalid waypoint ident — An attempt was made to
create a user waypoint with an invalid name. The 500Wseries unit does not allow spaces between characters in the
waypoint name.
Large magnetic variance — Verify all course angles
— A valid value of magnetic variation is not available for
this location. Check all course angles manually.
Loss of GPS Navigation - Use other nav if available
— The Dead Reckoning annunciator appears on the left
side of the map display when GPS position is unavailable
and the unit is in Dead Reckoning mode. Dead Reckoning
mode will continue until GPS position is restored. If there
is no flight plan, the message will only state “Loss of GPS
Navigation.”
Loss of integrity — cross-check NAV — The GPS position does not meet necessary criteria. Use other navigation
devices to verify your position and navigation.
Low Battery - Unit Needs Service — Time data may
have been lost due to a memory battery failure
MAIN processor requires service — The 500W-series
unit has detected a failure in the main system processor.
The 500W-series unit is not usable and should be taken to
your Garmin dealer for service.
Near airspace — less than 2 nm — Your GPS-calculated
position is within 2 nautical miles of a special use airspace
boundary, but you are not projected to enter the airspace.
This message is automatically disabled within 30 nautical
190-00357-00 Rev C
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
miles of an arrival airport, when an approach is loaded.
No altitude input is being received — No altitude data
is being received from RS-232 (Serializer: Icarus, Rosetta or
Shadin) or grey code inputs. If the problem persists, contact
your Garmin dealer and check the installation and installation settings.
No basemap data available — The 500W-series unit
has detected a failure in the built-in basemap (land data)
memory. Land data does not appear on the Map Page.
Other unit functions continue to work normally, however
the 500W-series unit should be taken to your Garmin
dealer for service at your earliest convenience.
Not receiving input data on 429 Channel #1 or #2
— No data has been received on the ARINC 429 channel
#1 connection for a period exceeding five seconds. If the
problem persists, the installation should be checked by your
Garmin dealer.
Not receiving input data on 232 Channel #(1 through
5) — No data has been received on one (or more) of the
RS-232 channel connections for a period exceeding ten
seconds. If the problem persists, the installation should be
checked by your Garmin dealer.
Not receiving traffic data — No traffic data is being
received. If the problem persists, the installation should be
checked by your Garmin dealer.
OBS key stuck — The OBS key is stuck in the enabled
(or pressed) state. Try pressing the OBS key again to cycle
its operation. If the message persists, contact your Garmin
dealer for assistance.
OBS not available — The OBS mode could not be
activated, because 1) no destination waypoint has been
selected, or 2) the GPS receiver cannot currently determine
its position.
Obstacle database integrity error — The 500Wseries unit has detected a problem with a database on the
TAWS/Terrain data card. The data is not usable and the card
should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
RAIM position warning — Although sufficient GPS
satellite coverage may exist, Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) has determined the information from
one or more GPS satellites may be in error. The resulting
GPS position may be in error beyond the limits allowed
for your current phase of flight. Cross-check your position
with an alternate navigation source. If the warning occurs
during a final approach segment (FAF to MAP), execute the
published missed approach.
Scheduler message [1-9]— [user entered text] — The
user-entered scheduler message time has expired, and the
scheduler message is displayed.
Searching the sky — The 500W-series unit is searching the
sky for GPS satellites.
Select appropriate frequency for approach — You
are inbound and within 3 nautical miles of the FAF; and
the active VLOC frequency does not match the published
frequency for the approach. Tune the standby VLOC
frequency to the proper frequency and press the VLOC
flip-flop key to “activate” the frequency.
Select VLOC on CDI for approach — (GNS 530W only)
You are inbound and within 3 nautical miles of the FAF;
and the active approach is not a GPS-approved approach.
Verify that the VLOC receiver is tuned to the proper frequency and press the CDI key to display “VLOC” (directly
above the CDI key).
Set course to [###]° — The course select for the external
CDI (or HSI) should be set to the specified course. The
message only occurs when the current selected course differs
from the desired track by 10°, or greater.
Steep turn ahead — This message appears approximately
one minute prior to a turn in one of the following three
conditions: 1) the turn requires a bank angle in excess of
25° in order to stay on course, 2) the turn requires a course
change greater than 175°, or 3) during a DME arc approach
the turn anticipation distance exceeds 90 seconds.
190-00357-00 Rev C
197
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Stored data was lost — All user waypoints, flight plans
and system settings have been lost due to a memory battery
failure or system reset.
Traffic device has failed — The 500W-series unit cannot
communicate with the SKY497 or TCAD and/or the SKY497
or TCAD is reporting a system failure.
Stormscope device has failed — The 500W-series unit
cannot communicate with the WX-500 and/or the WX-500
is reporting a system failure.
Traffic device needs service — the traffic device is reporting a system failure. The unit may still be usable, but should
be returned (at your earliest convenience) to your Garmin
dealer for service.
Stormscope heading has failed — The WX 500 is
reporting invalid heading data. The failure may be within
the WX 500 or other connected equipment.
TAWS has failed — The 500W-series unit has detected a
failure in its TAWS system. The most likely cause is a missing or corrupt Terrain database. If the Terrain database is
not the cause, the unit should be returned to your Garmin
dealer for service.
TAWS inhibit key stuck — The external TAWS inhibit
key is stuck.
TERRAIN configuration conflict — The current TAWS/
Terrain configuration is not supported by the hardware. The
TAWS hardware may have failed, or the unit may be misconfigured. The unit’s terrain capabilities will be downgraded to
“Terrain” instead of “TAWS”. Contact your Garmin dealer for
service.
TERRAIN configuration has changed — The unit’s
terrain settings have changed since it was last turned on in
normal mode. Contact your Garmin dealer for service.
Terrain database integrity error — The 500W-series unit
has detected a problem with a database on the TAWS/Terrain data card. The data is not usable and the card should
be returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
TERRAIN has failed — The unit has detected a failure
in the terrain system. The most likely cause is a missing
or corrupt Terrain database. Terrain functionality is not
available. If the Terrain database is not the cause, the unit
should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
Timer has expired — The count down timer has reached
zero.
198
True north approach - Change Mag Var HDG to true
— The selected approach requires navigation information
be referenced to true north. In the AUX function, change
Heading Mode to “true.”
User card format unknown — A data card has been
inserted, but the format of the card is not recognized.
VLOC has failed — The GNS 530W has detected a failure
in its VLOC receiver. The VLOC receiver is not available
and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for
service.
VLOC is not responding — (GNS 530W only) Internal
system-to-system communication between the main processor and the VLOC receiver has failed. Operational status
of the VLOC receiver is unknown and the unit should be
returned to your Garmin dealer for service.
VLOC needs service — (GNS 530W only) The unit has
detected a failure in its VLOC receiver. The VLOC receiver
may still be usable, but the unit should be returned (at your
earliest convenience) to your Garmin dealer for service.
VLOC remote transfer key is stuck — (GNS 530W
only) The remote VLOC transfer switch is stuck in the
enabled (or “pressed”) state. Try pressing the switch again
to cycle its operation. If the message persists, contact your
Garmin dealer for assistance.
VLOC transfer key stuck — (GNS 530W only) The
VLOC flip-flop key is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Try pressing the VLOC flip-flop key again to cycle
its operation. If the message persists, contact your Garmin
dealer for assistance.
190-00357-00 Rev C
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Waypoint already exists — The name you have entered
for a user waypoint already exists in memory.
Waypoint(s) have been replaced — One or more user
waypoints were updated during a unit-to-unit crossfill
operation.
Waypoint memory is full — You have used all 1000 user
waypoint locations in the 500W-series unit memory. Delete
unwanted waypoints to make room for new entries.
Turn Advisory and Arrival Annunciations
The following annunciator messages may appear in the
lower right corner of the 500W-series unit display:
Arriving at waypoint — Arriving at the destination
waypoint for the active leg.
Hold direct — “Direct” holding pattern entry.
Hold parallel — “Parallel” holding pattern entry.
Hold teardrop — “Teardrop” holding pattern entry.
Left to xxx° in xx sec — Turn advisory. Turn to the indicated heading by the time shown.
Left to xxx° now — Turn advisory. Turn to the indicated
heading by the time shown.
Next DTK xxx° in xx sec — Waypoint alert. Prepare to
turn to the indicated heading upon waypoint passage.
PTK end in xx sec — Parallel Offset is terminating.
Right to xxx° in xx sec — Turn advisory. Turn to the
indicated heading by the time shown.
Right to xxx° now — Turn advisory. Turn to the indicated
heading by the time shown.
190-00357-00 Rev C
199
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Blank Page
200
190-00357-00 Rev C
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Abbreviations
CUM — Cumulative
The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms
used on the 500W-series unit and their meanings:
DB — Database
DEN — Density
ACTV — Active
DEP — Departure
ALT — Altitude
DEPT — Departure guidance
APR — Approach
DIS — Distance
APT — Airport
DME — Distance Measuring Equipment
ARSPC — Airspace
DP — Departure Procedure
ARTCC — Air Route Traffic Control Center
DTK — Desired Track
ARVL — Arrival
AUX — Auxiliary
EFF — Efficiency
AVGAS — Aviation-grade Gasoline
ELEV — Elevation
AVTN — ENDUR — Endurance
Aviation
ENR — En Route
BARO — Barometric setting
ENT — Enter
BRG — EPU — Estimated Position Uncertainty
ESA — En Route Safe Altitude
Bearing To
°C — Degree Celsius
ETA — Estimated Time of Arrival
C/V — COM/VLOC
ETE — Estimated Time En Route
CAS — Calibrated Airspeed
CDI — Course Deviation Indicator
°F — Degrees Fahrenheit
CLR — Clear
FAF — Final Approach Fix
COM — Communications Transceiver
CRSR — Cursor
FDE — Fault Detection and
Exclusion
CTA — ICAO Control Area
FF — Fuel Flow
Common Traffic Advisory
Frequency
FIR — Flight Information Region
FLTA— Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Center (see ARTCC)
FOB — Fuel On Board
CTAF — CTR — 190-00357-00 Rev C
201
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
FPL — Flight Plan
kHz — Kilohertz
fpm — Feet Per Minute
km — Kilometers
FREQ — Frequency
kph — Kilometers Per Hour
FSS — Flight Service Station
kt — Knots
ft — Feet
L/VNAV — Lateral and vertical navigation
guidance, LNAV/VNAV service level
G/S — Glideslope
gl — Gallons
LAT/LON —Latitude/Longitude
GPS — Global Positioning System
lb — Pounds
GS — Ground Speed
LCL — Local
LFOB — Left-over Fuel On Board
LNAV — Lateral Navigation only
HAL — Horizontal Alarm Limit
HDG — Heading
HFOM — Horizontal Figure of Merit
hg — Inches of Mercury
HPL — Horizontal Protection Level
HWY — Highway
IAF — Intermediate Approach Fix
ID — Identifier
ig — Imperial Gallons
ILS — Instrument Landing System
IND — Indicated
INT — Intersection
INTEG — Integrity
ITI—
kg — 202
Imminent Terrain Impact
Kilograms
LNAV+V — Lateral Navigation with advisory
vertical guidance
LOC — LPV — Localizer
Lateral Precision Performance with
Vertical Guidance
LRES — Left-over Fuel Reserve Time
Lrg — Large
lt — Liters
°M — Degrees Magnetic
m, mt — Meters
MAP — Missed Approach Point
MAHP — Missed Approach Hold Point
MAPR — Missed approach guidance
mb — Millibars of Pressure
Med — Medium
MGRS — Military Grid Reference System. A
190-00357-00 Rev C
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Position format
PWR — Power
MHz — Megahertz
RAD — Radial
mi — Statute Miles
RAIM — MOA — Military Operations Area
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
mph — Statute Miles Per Hour
REF — Reference
mpm — Meters Per Minute
REQ — Required / Requirements
mps — Meters Per Second
RESTRICTD — MSA — Minimum Safe Altitude
RNG — Range
MSG — Message
RTC — Required Terrain Clearance
MSL — Mean Sea Level
RX — Receive
mul — Multicom
SBAS — Space-Based Augmentation System
NATNL — National
SID — Standard Instrument Departure
NAV — Sml — Small
NAVAID — Navigational Aid
SPD — Speed
NDB — Non-Directional Radio Beacon
SQ — Squelch
NM — Nautical Miles
SRFC — Surface
NRST — Nearest
STAR — Standard Terminal Arrival Route
NUM — Number
SUA — Special Use Airspace
Navigation
Restricted
SUSP — Waypoint Sequencing Suspended
OBS — Omnibearing Selector
OCN — Oceanic
°T — Degrees True
TACAN — Tactical Air Navigation
PDA — Premature Descent Alert
TAS — True Airspeed
P.POS — Present Position
TAT — Total Air Temperature
PROC — Procedure(s)
TEMP — Temperature
PROV — Province
TER — PTK — Parallel Track
TERM — Terminal
190-00357-00 Rev C
Terrain
203
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
TKE — Track Angle Error
TMA — ICAO Terminal Control Area
WAAS — Wide Area Augmentation System
TRANS — Transition
WPT — Waypoint
TRFC — Traffic
WX — Weather
TRK — Track (also Ground Track) Angle
TRSA — Terminal Radar Service Area
XTK — Crosstrack Error
twr — Tower
TX — Transmit
uni — Unicom
UTC — Coordinated Universal Time (also
GMT or “zulu”)
UTM/UPS — Universal Transverse Mercator /
Universal Polar Stereographic grids
VAL — Vertical Alarm Limit
VAR — Variation
VER — Version
VFOM — Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR — Visual Flight Rules
VLOC — VOR/Localizer Receiver
204
VNAV — Vertical Navigation
VOL — Volume
VOR — VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range
VPL — Vertical Protection Level
VS — Vertical Speed
VSR — Vertical Speed Required
190-00357-00 Rev C
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
Navigation Terms
expressed in distance per fuel units (e.g., nautical
miles per gallon).
The following navigation terms are used on the
500W-series unit:
WPT 2
NORTH
EPU (estimated position uncertainty) — A
measure of satellite geometry quality and additional
factors, expressed as a horizontal position error in feet
or meters.
DIS
DTK
ESA (en route safe altitude) — The recommended
minimum altitude within a ten mile radius of your
course on an active flight plan or direct-to.
BRG
ETA (estimate time of arrival) — The estimated
time at which you will reach your destination
waypoint, based upon current speed and track.
TRK
XT
K
ETE (estimated time en route) — The time it will
take to reach the destination waypoint, from present
position, based upon current ground speed.
NE
S
G
ENDUR (endurance) — Flight endurance, or total
available flight time based upon available fuel.
A
PL
R
AI
FF (fuel flow) — The fuel flow rate, expressed in fuel
units per time (e.g., gallons per hour).
WPT 1
FOB (fuel on board) — The total amount of usable
fuel on board the aircraft.
ALT (altitude) — Height above mean sea level
(MSL).
BRG (bearing) — The compass direction from your
present position to a destination waypoint.
CAS (calibrated airspeed) — Indicated airspeed
corrected for instrument errors.
CUM (cumulative) — The total of all legs in a flight
plan (such as “cumulative distance”).
DIS (distance) — The geodesic path from your present position to a destination waypoint.
DTK (desired track) — The desired course between
the active “from” and “to” waypoints.
EFF (efficiency) — A measure of fuel consumption,
Geodesic — an arc path that follows the shortest distance along an ellipsoid model of the earth (WGS-84).
A geodesic is more accurate than a “great circle” which
assumes a perfect sphere model of the earth.
GS (ground speed) — The velocity you are travelling
relative to a ground position.
HDG (heading) — The direction an aircraft is
pointed, based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional gyro.
IND (indicated) — Information provided by properly calibrated and set instrumentation in the aircraft
panel (e.g., “indicated altitude”).
190-00357-00 Rev C
205
12 - MESSAGES
ABBREVIATIONS &
NAV TERMS
TRK (track) — The direction of movement relative to
a ground position. Also referred to as “ground track.”
LFOB (left-over fuel onboard) — The amount of
fuel remaining on board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan (or a direct-to).
VSR (vertical speed required) — The vertical
speed necessary to descend from current position and
altitude to a defined target position and altitude, based
upon your current ground speed.
LRES (left-over fuel reserve) — The amount of fuel
remaining on board after the completion of a one or
more legs of a flight plan (or a direct-to), expressed
in time and based upon a known fuel consumption
(flow) rate.
XTK (crosstrack error) — The distance you are off a
desired course in either direction, left or right.
MSA (minimum safe altitude) — Used Grid Minimum Off-route Altitudes (Grid MORAs) to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of your present
position. Grid MORAs are one degree latitude by one
degree longitude in size and clear all reference points
within the grid by 1000 feet in areas where the highest
reference point is 5000 feet MSL or lower. If the highest reference point is above 5000 feet, the Grid MORA
clears the highest reference point by 2000 feet.
TKE (track angle error) — The angle difference
between the desired track and your current track. An
arrow indicates the proper direction to turn to reduce
TKE to zero.
AL
IC
RT
VE
V
NA
IG
IO
AT
N
O
PR
TIME AND DISTANCE
TO PROFILE
TIC
AL
E
VER
L
FI
CURRENT ALTITUDE
AND POSITION
SPE
ED
RE
QU
IRE
D
TARGET ALTITUDE
AND POSITION
DISTANCE TO TARGET
AIRPORT
206
190-00357-00 Rev C
APPENDIX A
NavData Card Use
Appendix A
NavData Card Use
The Jeppesen NavData® card supplied with your
500W-series unit should be installed or removed only
when the 500W-series unit is off. Insert the card with
the swing arm handle on the left and the label facing
up (see illustration left). If the NavData card is not
present when the unit is turned on, you will receive
a “No Jeppesen Aviation Database - Limited to user
defined waypoints” message on the Database Confirmation Page. If the NavData card is removed during
operation, a “Data card removed-Unit will restart in 30
seconds” warning appears. The 500W-series unit automatically reinitializes even if the card is re-inserted.
You may also reinitialize the unit manually by pressing
ENT.
2.
Turn the swing arm handle outward until it
locks into place, perpendicular to the face of
the 500W-series unit.
3.
Grasp the swing arm handle between your
thumb and forefinger, and pull directly away
from the face of the 500W-series unit to unseat
the connector and remove the NavData card.
To insert the NavData card:
1.
Place the card into the NavData card slot, with
the label facing up and the swing arm handle
on the left.
NOTE: There are two data card slots on the face of the
500W-series unit. The Jeppesen NavData® card should
be inserted in the left-most slot. The second slot is
provided for the TAWS/Terrain card.
2.
Press the NavData card into place until it seats
on the internal connector and the front of the
card is flush with the face of the 500W-series
unit.
3.
If the swing arm handle is up, gently lower the
handle and push it into place — flush with the
face of the 500W-series unit.
To remove the NavData card:
1.
Gently press on the tab — using a slight
motion toward the right — at the front center
of the NavData card. This partially deploys the
swing arm handle.
190-00357-00 Rev C
Press here to deploy handle
207
APPENDIX B
Specifications
Appendix B
Specifications
PHYSICAL
Unit Size: 6.25”W x 11.00”D x 4.60”H
(159mm x 279mm x 117mm)
Unit Weight with tray:
500W 6.8 pounds (3.08 kg)
530W 8.2 pounds (3.72 kg)
POWER
Input:
500W/530W
530AW VOR PERFORMANCE (GNS 530W only)
Frequency Range: 108.00 MHz to
117.95 MHz
LOCALIZER PERFORMANCE (GNS 530W only)
Frequency Range: 108.10 MHz to
111.95 MHz
GLIDESLOPE PERFORMANCE (GNS 530W only)
Frequency Range: 329.15 MHz to 335.00 MHz
14/28 Volts DC
28 Volts DC
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature:-20°C to +55°C (operating range)
(-4°F to +131°F)
Humidity: 95% non-condensing
Altitude:
-1,500 ft to 50,000 ft
(-457 m to 15,240 m)
GPS PERFORMANCE
Receiver:
15 parallel channel (12 + 3 WAAS)
Time to First Fix: 1 min 45 sec
Update Rate: Five per second, continuous
Accuracy: Position — < 1.25 m RMS horizontal
< 2 m vertical, with WAAS
Dynamics: 1000 kt maximum velocity
VHF COM PERFORMANCE (GNS 530W only)
Channels:
760 (25 kHz spacing) or
2280 (8.33 kHz spacing)
Frequency Range: 118.000 MHz to
136.992 MHz
Transmit Power:
10 watts minimum
(GNS 530W)
16 watts minimum
(GNS 530AW)
208
INTERFACES
• Garmin GDL 69/69A
• ARINC 429
• Aviation RS-232
• CDI/HSI
• RMI (digital: clock/data)
• Superflag Out
• Altitude (serial: Icarus, Shadin-Rosetta or
encoded: Gillham/Greycode)
• Fuel Sensor
• Fuel/Air Data
• L3 WX 500 Stormscope
• L3 SKY497 SkyWatch
• TIS from GTX 330
• Ryan 9900B TCAD
190-00357-00 Rev C
APPENDIX C
Troubleshooting Q & A
Appendix C
Troubleshooting Q & A
What is RAIM, and how does it affect approach operations?
This Appendix is designed to answer some of the
common questions regarding the 500W-series capabilities and operation. If you have a problem operating
the unit, read through this appendix and refer to the
reference section noted. If you don’t find answers to
your particular question here, use the index to find the
appropriate section elsewhere in this manual. If, after
reading through the appropriate reference section, you
still haven’t found the answer to your question, please
see your authorized dealer or contact Garmin directly
at the address or phone numbers listed on page ii.
Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and
customers.
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring, a GPS receiver function that performs a
consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures
that the available satellite geometry will allow the receiver
to calculate a position within a specified protection limit
(4.0 NM for oceanic/remote and 2.0 NM for en route,
1.0 NM for terminal and 0.3 NM for non-precision approaches).
During oceanic, en route and terminal phases of flight,
RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time. Because of
the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be
times when RAIM is not available. The 500W-series unit
automatically monitors RAIM and warns you with an alert
message (see Section 12) when it is not available, and the
INTEG annunciator (
) appears at the bottom
left corner of the screen. If RAIM is not available when
crossing the FAF, the pilot must fly the missed approach
procedure. The 500W-series unit RAIM prediction function (see Section 9 Aux Pages - Utility Page - RAIM Prediction) also allows you to see whether RAIM will be available
for a specified date and time.
NOTE: RAIM prediction is not directly related to
WAAS integrity.
RAIM integrity prediction is performed by the
internal GPS receiver and is performed at all times.
WAAS integrity is reported by the WAAS satellite
system and only works within the WAAS service
volume. WAAS approaches require WAAS integrity.
Outside of the WAAS service volume, such as an Oceanic flight, RAIM prediction will be used.
190-00357-00 Rev C
209
APPENDIX C
Troubleshooting Q & A
Why aren’t there any approaches available for my
flight plan?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind that
some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a published
approach, the 500W-series unit indicates “NONE” for the
available procedures — as listed on the Airport Approach
Page. For more information on selecting an approach, see
Section 4 - Flight Plans.
What happens when I select an approach? Can I store a
flight plan with an approach, departure or arrival?
Whenever you load an approach, departure or arrival
into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure or
arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan — along
with a header line describing the instrument procedure you
selected. The original en route portion of the flight plan
remains active, unless you “Activate” the instrument procedure; which may be done when the procedure is loaded or
at a later time.
210
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, departure or arrival. Keep in mind that the active flight plan
is erased when the unit is turned off and overwritten when
another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans
with an approach, departure or arrival, the 500W-series
unit uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed
or updated, the 500W-series unit automatically updates
the information if the procedure has not been modified. If
an approach, departure or arrival procedure is no longer
available, the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the flight plan or the correct database
is installed. For information on loading an approach, departure or arrival, see Section 5 - Procedures. See Section 4
- Flight Plans - Active Flight Plan Options for instructions on
saving and copying flight plans.
Can I file slant Golf (“/G”) using my GPS?
Yes, you may file your flight plan as /G if your 500Wseries unit is an authorized IFR installation. The 500W
series is a TSO C146a Gamma-3 (Class 3) authorized GPS
navigator. If you are flying en route, you may fly /G with
an expired database only after you have verified all route
waypoints. Approaches may not be flown with an expired
database. See your approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for more information.
190-00357-00 Rev C
APPENDIX C
Troubleshooting Q & A
What does the OBS key do and when do I use it?
The OBS key is used to select manual (OBS mode) or
to suspend automatic sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode (as indicated by an
annunciation
directly above the OBS key) holds your current “active
to” waypoint as your navigation reference and prevents
the GPS from sequencing to the next waypoint. When
OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing
is selected and the 500W-series unit automatically selects
the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has
crossed the present active-to waypoint.
NORMAL
(no “OBS” annunciator)
Automatic sequencing of
waypoints
Change in HSI does not
affect CDI deflection
Always navigates “TO” the
active waypoint
Must be in this mode for
final approach course
OBS
Manual sequencing“holds” on selected
waypoint
Manually select course to
next waypoint from HSI
Will indicate “TO” or
“FROM” waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published
holding patterns
When should I use the OBS key to return to auto
sequencing, and what happens when I do?
The most common application for using the OBS key
is the missed approach. The 500W-series unit suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a “SUSP”
annunciation directly above the OBS key; see left) when
you cross the missed approach point (MAP). This prevents the 500W-series unit from automatically sequencing to the missed approach holding point (MAHP). If a
missed approach is required, press the OBS key to return
to automatic waypoint sequencing and sequence the approach to the MAHP.
Why won’t my unit automatically sequence to the next
waypoint?
The 500W-series unit only sequences flight plan
waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e.,
no “OBS” or “SUSP” annunciation directly above the OBS
key). For automatic sequencing to occur, you must also
cross the “bisector” of the turn you are navigating. The
bisector is a perpendicular line between two flight plan
legs which crosses through the waypoint common to both
legs.
190-00357-00 Rev C
211
APPENDIX C
Troubleshooting Q & A
How do I skip a waypoint in an approach, departure,
or arrival?
When does turn anticipation begin, and what bank
angle is expected?
The 500W-series unit allows you to manually select
any approach, departure or arrival leg as the active leg of
your flight plan. This procedure is performed from the
Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the desired waypoint and pressing the direct-to key twice, then ENT to
approve the selection (see illustration left). The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg, so
ensure that you have clearance to that position. See Section
4 - Flight Plans - Flight Plan Options for more information.
The 500W-series unit smooths adjacent leg transitions
based upon a nominal 15º bank angle (with the ability to
increase the bank angle up to 30º) and provide three pilot
cues for turn anticipation:
1) A waypoint alert (“Left or Right to ###° in xx sec”)
flashes in the lower right corner of the screen 10
seconds before the turn point.
2) A flashing turn advisory (“Left or Right to ###° now”)
appears in the lower right corner of the screen when
you are to begin the turn. Set the HSI to the next
DTK value and begin the turn.
3) The To/From indicator on the HSI (or CDI) flips
momentarily to indicate that you have crossed the
midpoint of the turn. For more information on
waypoint alerts and turn advisories, see Section 5.
NOTE: If activating a leg while on the From side,
sequencing will be suspended as indicated with
the SUSP annunciation shown above the OBS
key.
How do I fly the GPS with an autopilot and DG heading bug?
If you do not have an HSI, you should make your
course selections on the external CDI’s OBS knob and the
DG heading bug.
212
When does the CDI scale change and what does it
change to?
The CDI scale is 1.0 NM (terminal mode) within 31
NM of the departure airport. The CDI will smoothly scale
to 2.0 NM (en route mode) once beyond 31 NM from the
departure airport.
The unit begins a smooth CDI scale transition from the
2.0 NM (en route mode) to the 1.0 NM (terminal mode)
scale within 31 NM from the destination airport. When
within 45° of the final approach course and the FAF is
the TO waypoint, the 500W-series unit switches from ter-
190-00357-00 Rev C
APPENDIX C
Troubleshooting Q & A
minal mode to approach mode. CDI scaling is tightened
from 1.0 NM full scale deflection to either 0.3 NM or 2°
full scale deflection whichever is less at the FAF. The scaling change occurs gradually over a 2 NM distance and is
completed before crossing the FAF.
If Vectors to Final is selected, the unit provides CDI
scaling appropriate to the approach, which is typically ±2
degrees angular from the origin of the approach. This angular course deviation reaches the max ±1 NM deviation
at approximately 27 NM from the MAP. The course width
and angular deviation for GPS approaches are similar to
what is provided for VHF localizer signals. (see the figure – Full-Scale deflection and defined path for VTF approach).
If a missed approach is executed, the CDI scale will
change to ±0.3 NM or ±1.0 NM, as described in Section
5 - Procedures - Flying the Missed Approach.
Full-Scale deflection and defined path for VTF approach
Why does my CDI not respond like a VOR when OBS
mode is active?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment
is based on the cross-track distance to the desired course
in OBS mode, not an angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant regardless of the distance to the destination and does
not become less sensitive when you are further away from
the destination. For more information on the CDI scale,
see Section 9 - Aux Pages - Setup Page (CDI/Alarms).
Full-Scale deflection and defined path for normal approach
1
1
NM NM
Sensitivity must change from ±1 NM FSD to either ±0.3 NM or
±2° FSD, whichever is less at the FAF. Change occurs over 2 NM
and is completed at the FAF.
2 NM
2 NM
2 NM
2 NM
CDI Comparison: GPS vs. VOR
190-00357-00 Rev C
213
APPENDIX C
Troubleshooting Q & A
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How
do I select the missed approach holding point?
How do I re-select the same approach or activate a new
approach after a missed approach?
The 500W-series unit does not automatically sequence
past the MAP. Waypoint sequencing to the first waypoint
in the missed approach procedure will be enabled when
the OBS key is pressed after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as
indicated on the approach plate.
After flying all missed approach procedures, you may
reactivate the same approach for another attempt from the
Procedures Page. Once you have been given clearance for
another attempt, activate the approach from the Procedures Page by highlighting “Activate Approach?” and then
pressing ENT. The 500W-series unit provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the
approach in sequence from that point on. See Section 4
- Flight Plans - Flight Plan Leg Selection for information on
activating a specific flight plan leg.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the
MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the direct-to key (by pressing it twice) to
activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select
the new procedure from the Procedures Page. To view the
Procedures Page, press PROC and turn the large right
knob to highlight “Select Approach?”. Press ENT and turn
the large right knob to highlight the new approach you
want to fly. Press ENT to select the approach, then select
the desired transition. Finally, highlight “Activate?” at the
bottom right corner of the screen and press ENT to activate the new approach.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press
direct-to and select the desired airport using the small
and large right knobs. Press ENT to accept the selected
airport, then follow the steps in the preceding paragraph
to select an approach for the new airport. See Section 5 for
more information on selecting and activating approaches.
214
190-00357-00 Rev C
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the same approach you’re currently on, prior to crossing the
missed approach point (MAP). If you attempt to
do so, an alert message (“Are you sure you want
to discontinue the current approach?”) appears.
If you still proceed with reactivating the approach, the 500W-series unit directs you back to
the transition waypoint and does NOT take into
consideration any missed approach procedures.
APPENDIX D
Index
Index
Symbols
3D navigation 8, 56, 57
A
Abbreviations 120, 122, 124, 132, 133, 134, 136, 193, 201
Accessories iii
Acquiring satellites 8, 57
Activate flight plan 22
Activate leg 79
Activating flight plans 67
Active flight plan 21, 71
Active leg 13, 31, 72, 86, 88, 91, 92, 98, 108, 109, 113
Airport
Approach 10, 125, 126, 210
Arrival 128
Departure 130
Finding 118
Frequency 123
Location 120
Nearest 148
Runway 121
Airspace 36, 153, 193, 196
Alert 20
Frequencies 37
Airspace alert 180
Alarms 177, 180
ALT 56, 163, 166, 167, 201, 205
Altitude i, 20, 31, 32, 41, 44, 46, 54, 55, 57, 87, 92, 96, 99,
101, 111, 182
Altitude buffer 156, 178, 180
Altitude input 102, 197
Annunciations 48, 58, 83, 125, 199
Approach 17, 73, 81, 193, 197, 212
Activate 82
Airport 125
Channel 127
DME arc 93
Hold 90
ILS 104
Localizer 113
LPV 110
Missed approach 88
Procedure turn 84
VTF 98
ARINC 197, 208
Arrival 17, 73, 81, 128, 182, 193, 212
ARTCC 18, 26, 145, 146, 151, 201
Auto-tuning 24, 25, 158
Automatic CDI switching 114
Automatic operation 168
Autopilot 84, 89, 95, 105, 113, 114, 115, 212
Auto zoom 33, 34, 39
Aux pages 161
Flight planning 162
Flight timer 173
Setup 1 177
Setup 2 187
Utility 170
B
Backcourse 110, 114
Backlight 179, 184, 194, 195
Bank angle 197, 212
Barometric pressure 163, 166, 182
Basemap 194, 197
Basic approach operation 83
Bearing indicator 13
C
Catalog 21, 32, 65, 67, 72
Cautions i, 48, 49, 156, 180
CDI 4, 59, 160, 177, 180, 194, 212
Ceiling 20, 36, 154, 155, 156, 181
Channel spacing 177, 180, 186
Checklists 7, 171, 172
City 39, 60, 118, 120, 133, 134
Clear 3
CLR 3, 12, 14
Com 2, 23, 194, 208
Tuning 24
Window 24
Comment 66, 70
Com configuration 180, 186
190-00357-00 Rev C
215
APPENDIX D
Index
Controlled airspace 20, 34, 36, 146, 154
Copying flight plans 69
Count down timer 173, 198
Course from 100
Course from fix 100, 101, 103
Course To 63
Creating user waypoints 136
Cross-side 68, 170
Crossfill 32, 68, 72, 141, 164, 168, 195
CRSR 3, 201
CTAF 25, 148, 201
Cursor 3
D
Database i, iii, 25, 32, 43, 46, 48, 82, 126, 158, 176
Database version 5, 47, 172, 176, 195
Data base integrity error 193, 194, 197, 198
Data fields 13, 32, 41, 56, 71, 180, 185
Data transfer 169, 195
Date 163, 167, 168, 171, 172, 175, 176, 179, 183, 209
Dead reckoning 57, 196
Declutter 14, 35
Default Nav page 13, 30
Density altitude 163, 166
Departure 17, 74, 81, 130, 212
Departure time 166, 171, 174
DG heading 212
Direct-To 3, 16, 19, 36, 59
Cancelling 63
City 60
Facility 60
Nearest airport 61
Display backlight 179, 184, 194
Distance 182
Distance measurements 40
DME arc 30, 93
DP 81, 130, 201
Dual units 32
Duplicate waypoints 119
E
E6B 161, 162
EFF 201, 205
216
EFIS 137, 194
Emergency channel 2, 28
ENDUR 165, 201, 205
ENR 83, 201
ENT 201
Enter 3
Environmental 208
EPU 57, 201, 205
F
Facility name 60, 118, 119, 120, 133, 134, 151, 152
Factory settings 32, 42, 187
Fault detection 192
FDE 57, 192, 201
FIR 18, 145, 201
Flight plan 4, 21, 65, 162
Activate leg 79
Create new 67
Delete 70
Editing 65
Flight timers 171, 173
Flip-flop key 2
Floor 36, 155, 181
FPL 4
Frequency list 15, 26, 53, 123
FSS 18, 26, 145, 146, 152, 202
Fuel 182
Fuel on board 7
Fuel planning 162, 164
G
GAD 196
Geodesic 205
Glideslope 195, 208
GNS 530W/AW 1
GPS 196, 208
GPS 500W 1
Great circle 205
H
HFOM 57
Hide aviation data 45
190-00357-00 Rev C
APPENDIX D
Index
Hold 90, 199
HSI 59
J
Panning 35
Range 31
Scale 34, 122
Setup 39
Symbols 34
MAPR 83
Map scale 14
Menu 3
Messages 4, 8
MGRS 179, 183
Minimum safe altitude 31, 206
Missed approach 88, 214
MOA 180
Model descriptions 1
Modifying user waypoints 139
MSA 31, 206
MSG 4
Jeppesen 207
N
K
Navcom 53
NavData Card 207
Navigation database 48
Navigation Terms 205
Nav pages 12, 29
Nav Terms 193
NDB 133, 149
Nearest 19, 145
Nearest airport 179
Next FPL airport 122, 124, 129, 131
NRST 4, 18
I
Ident audio and volume 157
IFR procedures 17
ILS 104, 181
ILS CDI Selection 105, 113, 178, 181
Inhibit
Terrain 45
Instrument panel self-test 6
Integ 8, 55, 171, 202, 209
Interfaces 208
Intersection 132, 149
Inverting flight plans 67
Keys 2
Key stuck 194
King autopilot 115
Knobs 2
L
LNAV/VNAV Approach 83, 111
Localizer 208
Localizer Approach 113
Local time 183
Low alt 83
LPV Approach 83, 110
M
Magnetic variation 182
MAHP 214
Manual transition 130
Map
Auto zoom 34
Datum 183
Page 14, 33, 38
O
OBS 4, 197, 211
OCN 83
Overzoom 34
P
Packing list iii
Page groups 10
Page summary 10
Panning 35
Parallel track 76
190-00357-00 Rev C
217
APPENDIX D
Index
Physical size 208
Position 179, 182
Power 2, 208
Power on 5
Premature descent alerting 49
Preset frequency 186
Pressure 182
PROC 4
Procedures 4, 17, 130
Procedure turn 84
PTT 194
R
RAIM 171, 175, 209
Range 3
Re-center CDI/HSI needle 59
Remote frequency control 28, 186
Rename waypoint 142
Restore defaults 78
Restoring factory settings 32, 42, 187
Roll steering 84, 89, 108, 113
Runway 121, 180, 184
S
Satellite status 7, 55
SBAS 187
Scheduler 163, 167, 197
Searching sky 8, 57
Selecting frequencies 9
Self-test 6
Sequence 211
Setup page 177, 187
Shortcuts 78
SIDs 17, 81, 130
Slant golf 210
Software version 172, 176
Sort list 70
Specifications 208
Speed 182
Squelch 23
Standard package iii
Standby frequency 9
STARs 17, 81
218
Stormscope 198
Stuck microphone 28
Sunrise/Sunset 163, 166
Symbols 34, 46
T
Takeoff tour 1
Target altitude 193
TAS 163
Temperature 182
TERM 83
Terrain 44
Alerts 48, 51
Symbols 46
Terrain database 176
Time 8, 55, 179, 183
Timer 198
Traffic 185, 198
Trip planning 163, 165
Trip statistics 171, 175
Troubleshooting 209
True airspeed 166
Turn advisory 29
Turn anticipation 212
U
Units 179, 182
UPS 183
User comment 66
User waypoint 135, 141, 151
UTC 183
Utility 170
UTM 179, 183
V
Vertical speed 182, 191
VFOM 57
VHF com 208
View frequencies 37
VLOC 2, 9, 150, 157, 197, 198
VNAV 4, 189, 193
Volume 2, 23
190-00357-00 Rev C
APPENDIX D
Index
VOR 134, 150, 208
VSR 191
VTF 82, 97
W
WAAS approach ID 125, 127
Warranty iv
Waypoints 117
Waypoint alert 29
WGS 84 179
Winds 163, 166
Winds aloft 166
Wind vector 39, 40
Wx broadcast 133, 134
190-00357-00 Rev C
219
APPENDIX D
Index
Blank Page
220
190-00357-00 Rev C
© 2008 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd., S.E., Salem, Oregon 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park,
Southhampton, SO40 9RB, U.K
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
www.garmin.com
Part Number 190-00357-00 Rev C